- Computers & electronics
- Print & Scan
- Printing supplies
- Toners & Laser Cartridges
- Brother
- MFC 9970CDW
- User's Guide
- 315 Pages
Brother MFC 9970CDW Multifunction Printer User's Guide
Below you will find brief information for Multifunction Printer MFC 9970CDW. This machine combines the functions of a printer, scanner, copier, and fax, so you can perform all your office tasks in one place. You can print documents, scan to a computer, copy documents, and send and receive faxes. The MFC 9970CDW also has a large touchscreen display for easy navigation, and a variety of features to make your work easier.
advertisement
Assistant Bot
Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.
PANTONE2728
®
User
’
’ s Guide
Safety and Legal
Basic User’s Guide
Advanced User’s Guide
Safety and Legal
(HL-4140CN / 4150CDN / 4570CDW(T) / DCP-9055CDN / 9270CDN / MFC-9460CDN / 9465CDN / 9970CDW)
A
Not all models are available in all countries.
Please read this booklet before attempting to operate the product, or before attempting any maintenance. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an increased risk of fire, electrical shock, burns or suffocation.
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are used throughout the documentation.
A
Bold
Italics
Courier
New
Bold typeface identifies specific buttons on the product’s control panel, on the computer screen.
Italicized typeface emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Text in the Courier New font identifies messages on the
LCD of the product.
Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the operation works with other features.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Improper Setup icons alert you to devices and operations that are not compatible with the product.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch product parts that are hot.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
Note
The illustrations in this guide show the
HL-4150CDN and MFC-9460CDN.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
Version B
UK/IRE
1
2
Compilation and Publication
Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published, covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors relating to the publication.
A
Choosing a location
Put your product on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk.
Put the product near a telephone socket and a standard grounded electrical socket. Choose a location where the temperature remains between 10
°C and 32.5°C and the humidity is between
20% to 80% (without condensation).
A
WARNING
DO NOT expose the product to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive gasses, moisture or dust.
DO NOT place the product near heaters, air conditioners, desk fan, refrigerators, water or chemicals.
CAUTION
Avoid placing your product in a high-traffic area.
DO NOT put the product where the ventilation holes of the product are blocked. Keep a gap of roughly 100 mm between the ventilation holes and the wall.
DO NOT connect your product to electrical sockets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers, or to the same circuit as large appliances that might disrupt the power supply.
Disruption of power can delete information from the product’s memory.
Avoid interference sources, such as other cordless telephone systems or speakers.
Make sure cables leading to the product do not constitute a trip hazard.
DO NOT eat the Silica Pack. Discard immediately.
3
4
To use the product safely
WARNING
There are high voltage electrodes inside the product. Before you clean the inside of the product, make sure you have unplugged the telephone line cord first (MFC only) and then the power cord from the electrical socket. Doing this will prevent an electrical shock.
A
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.
This product must be installed near an electrical socket that is easily accessible. In case of an emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the electrical socket to shut off the power completely.
Plastic bags are used in the packing of your product and drum unit. Plastic bags are not toys.
To avoid the danger of suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children and dispose of them properly.
DO NOT use flammable substances near the product. DO NOT use any type of spray to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock. See Routine
Maintenance in the User's Guide/Basic User's Guide for how to clean the product.
DO NOT use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the toner dust with a dry, lint-free soft cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.
Be careful not to inhale toner.
5
• This product is heavy and weighs more than 21.0 kg for Printer, and more than 26.5 kg for
MFC/DCP. To prevent injuries when moving or lifting this product, make sure to use at least two people. Be careful not to pinch your fingers when you set the product back down.
• If you use a Lower Tray, carry it separately from your product.
6
(MFC only)
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall socket.
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall socket in a wet location.
(MFC only)
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people, including the following:
1 DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or washing product, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2 Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
3 DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
4 We DO NOT advise using an extension lead.
5 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall socket in a wet location.
6 If any cables become damaged, disconnect your product, and contact your Brother dealer.
7 DO NOT place any objects on the product, or obstruct the air vents.
8 This product should be connected to an adjacent grounded AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact a qualified electrician.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.
Languages on the label may vary depending on your country.
7
8
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the product, some internal parts of the product will be extremely hot.
Wait for the product to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the product.
(MFC-9460CDN / MFC-9465CDN / DCP-9055CDN only)
Some areas of the product can cause injury if covers (shaded) are closed with force. Take care when placing your hand in the areas shown in the illustrations.
(MFC and DCP only)
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the areas shown in the illustrations.
9
IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove or damage any of the caution or warning labels inside the product.
10
Important safety instructions
1 Read all of these instructions.
2 Save them for later reference.
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
4 Unplug this product from the wall socket before cleaning inside of the product. DO NOT use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a dry, lint-free soft cloth for cleaning.
5 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.
6 Slots and openings in the casing at the back or bottom are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless adequate ventilation is provided.
7 This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact a qualified electrician.
8 This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug. This plug will only fit into a grounded power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, call your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. DO NOT defeat the purpose of the grounded plug.
9 Use only the power cord supplied with this product.
10 DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people can walk on the cord.
11 Use the product in a well-ventilated area.
12 The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 5 metres.
DO NOT share the same power circuit with other high powered appliances, such as an air conditioner, copier, shredder, and so on.
13 DO NOT place anything in front of the product that will block received faxes or printed pages.
DO NOT place anything in the path of received faxes or printed pages.
14 Wait until pages have exited the product before picking them up.
15 Unplug this product from the power socket and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized Service
Personnel under the following conditions:
When the power cord is damaged or frayed.
If liquid has been spilled into the product.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Incorrect adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
A
11
If the product has been dropped or the casing has been damaged.
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
16 To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of a power protection device (Surge Protector).
17 To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, note the following:
DO NOT use this product near appliances that use water, a swimming pool or in a wet basement.
DO NOT use the product during an electrical storm (there is the remote possibility of an electrical shock) or to report a gas leak (MFC only) in the vicinity of the leak.
DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of a gas leak.
12
Regulation
Approval Information (MFC only)
THIS EQUIPMENT IS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH A TWO WIRE ANALOGUE PSTN LINE
FITTED WITH THE APPROPRIATE CONNECTOR.
Brother advises that this product may not function correctly in a country other than where it was originally purchased, and does not offer any warranty in the event that this product is used on public telecommunication lines in another country.
A
Declaration of Conformity (Europe only)
(HL-4570CDW / HL-4570CDWT / MFC-9460CDN / MFC-9465CDN /
MFC-9970CDW only)
A
We, Brother Industries, Ltd.
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements of Directives
1999/5/EC and 2005/32/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) is on our Website.
Please go to http://solutions.brother.com/.
i
choose region (eg. Europe) i
choose country i
choose your model i
choose “Manuals” i
choose Declaration of Conformity (Select Language when required.)
A
13
Declaration of Conformity (Europe only)
(HL-4140CN / HL-4150CDN / DCP-9055CDN / DCP-9270CDN only)
A
We, Brother Industries, Ltd.
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements of Directives
2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and 2005/32/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) is on our Website.
Please go to http://solutions.brother.com/.
i
choose region (eg. Europe) i
choose country i
choose your model i
choose “Manuals” i
choose Declaration of Conformity (Select Language when required.)
IEC60825-1:2007 Specification (For 220-240V Models Only)
This product is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC60825-1:2007 specifications. The label shown below is attached in countries where required.
A
This product has a Class 3B Laser Diode which emits invisible laser radiation in the Scanner Unit. The Scanner Unit should not be opened under any circumstances.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT
Internal Laser radiation
Wave length: 770 - 800 nm
Output: 20 mW max.
Laser Class: Class 3B
WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
A
14
Disconnect device
This product must be installed near an electrical socket that is easily accessible. In case of emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the electrical socket to shut off power completely.
A
Wiring information (U.K. only)
If you need to replace the plug fuse, fit a fuse that is approved by ASTA to BS1362 with the same rating as the original fuse.
Always replace the fuse cover. Never use a plug that does not have a cover. If in any doubt, call a qualified electrician.
Warning -This product must be earthed.
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in line with the following code:
Green and Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
A
LAN connection (Network models only)
A
CAUTION
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.
Radio interference
This product complies with EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22)/Class B.
A
15
EU Directive 2002/96/EC and EN50419
This equipment is marked with the above recycling symbol. It means that at the end of the life of the equipment you must dispose of it separately at an appropriate collection point and not place it in the normal domestic unsorted waste stream. This will benefit the environment for all.
(European Union only)
International ENERGY STAR
®
HL-4140CN)
Qualification Statement (except
A
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR
®
Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.
As an ENERGY STAR
®
Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR
®
specifications for energy efficiency.
A
16
Trademarks
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Outlook and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Apple, Macintosh, Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United
States and other countries.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Intel, Intel Core and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, Photoshop, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Corel and CorelDRAW are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Alliance are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
A
17
Open Source Licensing Remarks
This product includes open-source software.
Please see Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright information on the supplied CD-ROM.
(For Windows
®
) “X:\License.txt” (where X is your drive letter).
(For Macintosh) Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop. Then double-click the Utilities icon. License.rtf will appear.
A
Copyright and License
©2010 Brother Industries, Ltd.
This product includes software developed by the following vendors:
©1983-1998 PACIFIC SOFTWORKS, INC.
©2010 Devicescape Software, Inc.
This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc.
A
Other Information (MFC only)
FlashFX
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Copyright 1998-2010 Datalight, Inc.
U.S.Patent Office 5,860,082/6,260,156
FlashFX
®
Pro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2010 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved
A
18
Unlawful use of copying equipment
(MFC and DCP only)
It is an offence to make reproductions of certain items or documents with the intent to commit fraud. The following is a non-exhaustive list of documents which it may be unlawful to produce copies of. We suggest you check with your legal adviser and/or the relevant legal authorities if in doubt about a particular item or document:
Currency
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
Certificates of Deposit
Armed forces service or draft papers
Passports
Postage stamps (cancelled or uncancelled)
Immigration papers
Welfare documents
Cheques or drafts drawn by governmental agencies
Identifying badges or insignias
In addition, driving licenses and/or Certificates of Title to motor vehicles may not be copied under certain national laws.
Copyrighted works cannot be copied lawfully, subject to the “fair dealing” exception relating to sections of a copyrighted work. Multiple copies would indicate improper use. Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.
A
19
BASIC USER’S GUIDE
MFC-9970CDW
Version 0
UK/IRE
If you need to call Customer Service
Please complete the following information for future reference:
Model Number: MFC-9970CDW
Date of Purchase:
Place of Purchase:
1
The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain this User’s Guide with your sales receipt as a permanent record of your purchase, in the event of theft, fire or warranty service.
Register your product on-line at
http://www.brother.com/registration/
© 2010 Brother Industries, Ltd.
User's Guides and where do I find it?
Which manual?
Safety and Legal
Quick Setup Guide
What's in it?
Read this Guide first. Please read the
Safety Instructions before you set up your machine. See this Guide for trademarks and legal limitations.
Follow the instructions for setting up your machine and installing the drivers and software for the operating system and connection type you are using.
Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and
Direct Print operations and how to replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.
Where is it?
Printed / In the box
Printed / In the box
Basic User's Guide
Advanced User's Guide
Learn more advanced operations: Fax,
Copy, security features, printing reports and performing routine maintenance.
Software User's Guide
Follow these instructions for Printing,
Scanning, Network Scanning, Remote
Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.
Network Glossary
Network User's Guide
This Guide provides basic information about advanced network features of
Brother machines along with explanations about general networking and common terms.
This Guide provides useful information about wired and wireless network settings and security settings using the
Brother machine. You can also find supported protocol information for your machine and detailed troubleshooting tips.
Printed / In the box
For
HUN/BUL/ROM/POL/SVK/CZE:
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
i
ii
Table of Contents
(BASIC USER’S GUIDE)
1
2
3
4
General information 1
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation ....................................1
Accessing the Advanced User’s Guide, Software User’s Guide and
Accessing Brother Support (Windows
)................................................................4
Loading paper 11
Loading paper in the standard paper tray......................................................11
Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray (MP tray) ........................................13
Unscannable and unprintable areas ..............................................................17
Recommended paper and print media ..........................................................21
Handling and using special paper .................................................................23
Loading documents 26
Using the automatic document feeder (ADF) ................................................26
Sending a fax 28
Faxing Letter/Legal/Folio size documents from the scanner glass................29
5
6
7
8
Receiving a fax 32
F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)...............................................................34
Telephone and external devices 36
Recording an outgoing message (OGM)....................................................... 38
Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................39
Operation from external or extension telephones..........................................39
Using extension telephones (U.K. only) ........................................................39
Using a non-Brother cordless external handset ............................................40
Dialling and storing numbers 42
One Touch and Speed Dial Storage Options ................................................ 45
Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................46
Changing or Deleting One Touch and Speed Dial numbers .........................49
Making copies 51
iii
iv
9 Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage 52
3™ file for direct printing ....................................52
Changing the default settings for direct print .................................................54
10 How to print from a computer 55
11 How to scan to a computer 56
A Routine maintenance 58
Cleaning the outside of the machine .............................................................87
Cleaning the laser scanner windows .............................................................89
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers...............................................................103
B Troubleshooting 107
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report .............................................114
Document is jammed in the top of the ADF unit ..........................................115
Document is jammed under the document cover ........................................115
Removing small documents jammed in the ADF.........................................116
Document is jammed at the output tray .......................................................116
Paper is jammed in the MP tray ..................................................................117
Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2 ...................................................118
Paper is jammed at the back of the machine ..............................................119
Paper is jammed inside the machine...........................................................121
Paper is jammed underneath paper tray 1 ..................................................125
C
D
E
Menu and features 147
Specifications 184
Index 200
v
vi
Table of Contents
(ADVANCED USER’S GUIDE)
The Advanced User's Guide explains the following features and operations.
You can view the Advanced User's Guide on the Documentation CD-ROM in the box.
1 General Setup
Memory storage
Automatic daylight savings time
Ecology features
LCD screen
Mode Timer
2 Security features
Secure Function Lock 2.0
Setting Lock
Restricting dialling
3 Sending a fax
Additional sending options
Additional sending operations
Polling overview
4 Receiving a fax
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)
Additional receiving operations
Polling overview
5 Dialling and storing numbers
Telephone line services
Additional dialling operations
Additional ways to store numbers
6 Printing reports
Fax reports
Reports
7 Making copies
Copy settings
A Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking the machine
Replacing periodic maintenance parts
Packing and shipping the machine
B Options
Optional paper tray (LT-300CL)
Memory board
C Glossary
D Index
1
General information
Using the documentation
Thank you for buying a Brother machine!
Reading the documentation will help you make the most of your machine.
1
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are used throughout the documentation.
1
Bold
Italics
Courier
New
Bold style identifies keys on the machine control panel or computer screen.
Italicized style emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Courier New font identifies the messages shown on the LCD of the machine.
1
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a possible electrical shock.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch machine parts that are hot.
Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the current operation works with other features.
1
1
2
Chapter 1
Accessing the
Advanced User’s
Guide, Software User’s
Guide and Network
User’s Guide
1
This Basic User's Guide does not contain all the information about the machine such as how to use the advanced features Fax, Copy,
Printer, Scanner, PC-Fax and Network.
When you are ready to learn detailed information about these operations, read the
Advanced User's Guide, Software User’s
Guide, Network User’s Guide, and
Network Glossary that are on the
Documentation CD-ROM.
Viewing Documentation
a
Turn on your computer. Insert the
Documentation CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive.
Note
(Windows
®
users) If the screen does not appear automatically, go to My Computer
(Computer), double-click the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click index.html.
b
(Macintosh users) Double-click the
Documentation CD-ROM icon, and then double-click index.html.
1
c
Click your country.
d
Point to your language, point to
View Guide, and then click the guide you want to read.
Note
• (Windows
®
users only) Your web browser may display a yellow bar at the top of the page that contains a security warning about Active X controls. For the page to be displayed correctly, you must click on
Allow Blocked Content, then click on
Yes in the Security Warning dialog box.
• (Windows
®
users only)
access, you can copy all user documentation in PDF format to a local folder on your computer. Point to your language, then click Copy to local disk.
1
Microsoft
®
Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or greater.
How to find Scanning instructions
There are several ways you can scan documents. You can find the instructions as follows:
Software User's Guide
1
Scanning
ControlCenter
Network Scanning
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™12SE with OCR
How-to-Guides
(Windows
®
)
The complete ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE with OCR How-to-
Guides can be viewed from the Help section in the ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE application.
General information
Presto! PageManager User’s Guide
(Macintosh)
Note
Presto! PageManager must be downloaded and installed before use. See
Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh) on page 4 for further instructions.
The complete Presto! PageManager
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help section in the Presto! PageManager application.
How to find Network setup instructions
Your machine can be connected to a wireless or wired network. You can find basic setup instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your wireless access point or router supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup or AOSS™, you can also follow the steps in the Quick Setup Guide. For more information about network setup please see the Network User's Guide on the
Documentation CD-ROM.
1
3
Chapter 1
Accessing Brother
Support (Windows
®
)
You can find all the contacts you will need, such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center) on the Installation CD-ROM.
Click Brother Support on the main menu.
The following screen will appear:
1
Accessing Brother
Support (Macintosh)
You can find all the contacts you will need, such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center) on the Installation CD-ROM.
Double-click the Brother Support icon.
The following screen will appear:
1
4
To access our website
(http://www.brother.com/), click Brother
Home Page.
For the latest news and product support information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
To visit our website for original Brother
Supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click
Supplies Information.
To access the Brother CreativeCenter
(http://www.brother.com/creativecenter/) for FREE photo projects and printable downloads, click Brother
CreativeCenter.
To return to the main page, click Back or if you have finished, click Exit.
To download and install Presto!
PageManager, click
Presto! PageManager.
To register your machine from the Brother
Product Register Page
(http://www.brother.com/registration/), click On-Line Registration.
For the latest news and product support information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
To visit our website for original Brother
Supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click
Supplies Information.
General information
1
5
6
Chapter 1
Control panel overview
1 2
01.01.2011 15:15
03
Address
Book
MENU
Secure
Direct
Fax
1
1 One Touch keys
These 20 keys give you instant access to 40 previously stored numbers.
21-40 b
The 21-40 b lets you access One Touch numbers 21 to 40 when held down.
2 LCD
This is a Touchscreen LCD. You can access the menus and options by pressing buttons displayed on the screen.
3 Mode keys:
FAX
Puts the machine in Fax mode.
SCAN
Puts the machine in Scan mode.
COPY
Puts the machine in Copy mode.
4 Dial pad
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax numbers and as a keyboard for entering information into the machine.
This function transfers to the touchscreen when you store quick dial numbers.
The # key temporarily switches the dialling mode from Pulse to Tone during a telephone call.
5 Stop/Exit
Stops an operation or exits from a menu.
6 Start:
Colour
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies in full colour.
Mono
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies in black & white.
General information
2
01.01.2011 15:15
03
Address
Book
MENU
Secure
Direct
Fax
3 4 5
1
7 FAX keys:
Tel/R
This key is used to have a telephone conversation after picking up the external handset during the F/T fast double-ring.
When connected to a PBX, you can use this key to gain access to an outside line, to recall an operator, or to transfer a call to another extension.
Redial/Pause
Redials the last number called. It also inserts a pause when programming quick dial numbers or when dialling a number manually.
8 Print Data / Job Cancel
Cancels a programmed print job and clears it from the machine’s memory. To cancel multiple print jobs, hold down this key until the
LCD shows Cancel Printing (All).
Also, this key will flash depending on the machine’s status.
8 7 6
Machine Status Description
Ready Mode The machine is ready to print, in sleep mode, there is no print data, or the power switch is off.
Receiving Data The machine is either receiving data from the computer, processing data in memory, or printing data.
Green (blinking)
Data Remaining in Memory
Print data remains in the machine memory.
Green
7
8
Chapter 1
LCD Touchscreen
The LCD Touchscreen shows the current machine status when the machine is idle.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
01.01.2011 15:15
03
Fax
Address
Book
MENU
Secure
Direct
Setting Lock
11 10 9 8
1 Date and Time
Lets you see date and time.
2 MENU
Lets you access the main menu.
3 Fax duplex (2–sided) receiving indicator
Appears when duplex printing is set to on for received faxes.
4 Secure Print
Lets you access the secure print menu.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
5 Fax in memory
Shows how many received faxes are in the memory.
6 Wireless Status
In FAX mode and SCAN mode a four level indicator shows the current wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless connection.
0 Max
7 Current Receive Mode
Lets you see the current receive mode.
Fax
(Fax only)
F/T
(Fax/Tel)
TAD
(External TAD)
Mnl
(Manual)
8 Direct Print
Lets you print data from a USB flash memory drive or a digital camera supporting mass
storage directly to the machine. (See Printing
data directly from the USB Flash memory drive
or digital camera supporting mass storage on page 53.)
Active only when you insert a USB flash memory drive or digital camera in the machine's USB direct interface.
9 Security indicator
Shows machine's security status. Appears when you turn on Secure Function Lock or
Setting Lock.
10 Warning icon
Appears when there is an error or maintenance message; press the Warning icon to view it, and then press Stop/Exit to return to the
Ready screen.
11 Address Book
Lets you search the number you want to fax/dial/E-mail/I-Fax.
Basic Operations
To operate the Touchscreen use your finger to press the menu or option button directly on the LCD screen.
To display and access all the screen menus or options in a setting, press a b or d c to scroll through them.
Press to return to the previous menu.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the Touchscreen with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.
1
The following steps show how to change a setting in the machine. In this example the
LCD back light setting is changed from
Light
to Dark.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
MENU
General Setup
Fax
Printer
Print Reports c
Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
Press LCD Settings.
MENU
General Setup
Mode Timer
Tray Setting
Volume
Ecology d
Press Backlight.
MENU > General Setup
LCD Settings
Backlight
Dim Timer
Light
Off
General information e
Press Dark.
MEMU > General Setup > LCD Settings
Backlight
Light
Dark f
Press Stop/Exit.
Med
1
9
Chapter 1
Volume settings
Ring volume
You can choose a range of ring volume levels, from High to Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.
d
Press Ring.
e
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Beeper volume
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep when you press a key, make a mistake, or after you send or receive a fax. You can choose a range of volume levels, from High to Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.
d
Press Beeper.
e
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
1
1
1
Speaker volume
You can choose a range of speaker volume levels, from High to Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.
d
Press Speaker.
e
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
1
10
2
Loading paper
2
Loading paper and print media
The machine can feed paper from the standard paper tray, optional lower tray or multi-purpose tray.
When you put paper into the paper tray, note the following:
If your application software supports paper size selection on the print menu, you can select it through the software. If your application software does not support it, you can set the paper size in the printer driver or by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
2
Loading paper in the standard paper tray
2
You can load up to 250 sheets for Tray 1 and
500 sheets for the optional lower tray
(Tray 2). Paper can be loaded up to the maximum paper mark (b b b) on the sliding paper width guide. (For recommended paper
to use, see Paper capacity of the paper trays on page 22.)
Printing on plain paper, thin paper or recycled paper from the standard paper tray (Tray 1)
2
a
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2
WARNING
DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.
11
Chapter 2 b
While pressing the green paper-guide release lever (1), slide the paper guides to fit the paper size you are loading in the tray. Make sure that the guides are firmly in the slots.
d
Put paper in the tray and make sure:
The paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b) (1).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.
The side to be printed on must be
face down.
The paper guides touch the sides of the paper so it will feed properly.
1
1 c
Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.
e
Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine. Make sure that it is completely inserted into the machine.
f
Lift up the support flap (1) to prevent paper from sliding off the face-down output tray or remove each page as soon as it comes out of the machine.
1
12
Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
2
You can load up to 3 envelopes or special print media in the MP tray or up to 50 sheets of plain paper. Use this tray to print or copy on thick paper, bond paper, glossy paper, labels, or envelopes. (For recommended paper to
use, see Paper capacity of the paper trays on page 22.)
Printing on plain paper, bond paper, labels or glossy paper from the MP tray
2
a
Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
Loading paper b
Pull out the MP tray support and unfold the flap (1).
1
2
13
Chapter 2 c
Put paper in the MP tray and make sure:
The paper stays under the maximum paper mark (1).
The top of paper edge is positioned between the arrows (2).
The side to be printed on must be
face up with the leading edge (top of the paper) in first.
1
d
Lift up the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face-down output tray, or remove each page as soon as it comes out of the machine.
2
14
Note
When you are using glossy paper, put only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.
Printing on envelopes and thick paper from the MP tray
2
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
Loading paper b
Pull out the MP tray support and unfold the flap (1).
2
a
Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
1
c
Lift up the support flap to prevent envelopes or thick sheets of paper from sliding off the face-down output tray. If the support flap is closed you should remove each envelope as soon as it comes out of the machine.
d
Put up to 3 envelopes or up to 25 sheets of thick paper (163 g/m
2
) in the MP tray.
If you add more envelopes or paper it may cause a jam. Make sure:
The top edge of the envelope is positioned between the arrows (1).
The side to be printed on must be
face up.
15
Chapter 2 f
Pull down the two grey levers, one on the left-hand side and one on the righthand side, to the envelope position as shown in the illustration below.
1 e
Open the back cover (Face-up output tray).
g
Close the back cover.
h
Send the print data to the machine.
i
When you have finished printing, open the back cover and reset the two grey levers which were pulled down in
step f back to their original positions.
Note
• Remove each printed envelope immediately to prevent a paper jam.
• If your thick paper curls during printing, put only one sheet at a time in the MP tray and open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed pages exit to the face-up output tray.
16
Loading paper
Unscannable and unprintable areas
The figures below show maximum unscannable and unprintable areas. The unscannable and unprintable areas may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the application you are using.
2
2
1
2
2
Usage Document
Size
Fax (Sending) Letter
1
A4
Copy
*
Letter
* a single copy or a 1 in 1 copy
Scan
A4
Letter
A4
Letter
A4
4 mm
3 mm
3 mm
4 mm
4 mm
Top (1)
Bottom (1)
3 mm
3 mm
4 mm
4 mm
3 mm
3 mm
4 mm
4 mm
Left (2)
Right (2)
4 mm
3 mm
4 mm
17
Chapter 2
Paper settings
Paper Size and Type
When you change the size of paper in the tray, you will also need to change the setting for paper size at the same time so your machine can fit the document or an incoming fax on the page.
You can use the following sizes of paper for printing copies: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive,
A5, A5 L, A6, B5, B6 and Folio and the following sizes for printing faxes: A4, Letter,
Legal or Folio (8.5 in.
× 13 in.).
Following on the paper size setting, you can set up the machine for the type of paper you are using. This will give you the best print quality.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.
d
Do one of the following:
To set the paper type for the
MP Tray
press a or b to display
MP Tray
.
Press MP Tray
To set the paper type for Tray#1 press a or b to display Tray#1.
Press Tray#1
To set the paper type for Tray#2 press a or b to display Tray#2.
optional tray.
if you installed the
1
The Tray#2 button will be selectable if the optional tray is installed.
2
2
e
Press d or c to display the paper size options.
Press A4, Letter, Legal,
Executive
, A5, A5 L, A6, B5, B6,
Folio
or Any.
Note
• The Any option appears only when you choose the MP tray.
• If you choose Any for the MP Tray Paper
Size: You must choose MP Only for the
Tray Use setting. You cannot use the Any
Paper Size selection for the MP tray when making N in 1 copies. You must choose one of the other available Paper Size selections for the MP tray.
• A5 L and A6 size are not available for
Tray#2
.
f
Press Thin, Plain, Thick, Thicker,
Recycled Paper
or Glossy. g
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can choose Glossy for the
MP Tray
.
18
Tray Use in copy mode
You can change the priority tray that the machine will use for printing copies.
When you choose Tray#1 Only, MP Only or Tray#2 Only
, the machine pulls the paper only from that tray. If the selected tray is out of paper, No Paper will appear on the
LCD. Insert the paper in the empty tray.
To change the tray setting follow the instructions below: a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.
d
Press a or b to display
Tray Use:Copy
.
Press Tray Use:Copy.
e
Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only
,
MP Only
, MP>T1>T2
.
1
The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the optional tray is installed.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• When loading the documents in the ADF and MP>T1>T2 or T1>T2>MP is selected, the machine looks for the tray with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray. If no tray has suitable paper, the machine pulls paper from the higher priority tray.
• When using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray.
2
Loading paper
Tray Use in fax mode
You can change the default tray that the machine will use for printing received faxes.
When you choose Tray#1 Only, MP Only
, the machine pulls the paper only from that tray. If the selected tray is out of paper, No Paper will appear on the
LCD. Insert the paper in the empty tray.
When you choose T1>T2
, the machine pulls paper from Tray #1 until it is empty, then from Tray #2, and then from the MP tray.
When you choose MP>T1>T2
pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, then from Tray #1, and then from Tray #2.
2
Note
• You can use four sizes of paper for printing faxes: A4, Letter, Legal or Folio.
When a suitable size is not in any of the trays received faxes will be stored in the machine’s memory and Size mismatch will appear on the LCD. (For details, see
Error and maintenance messages on page 107.)
• If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s memory,
No Paper
will appear on the LCD. Insert paper in the empty tray.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.
d
Press a or b to display Tray Use:Fax.
Press Tray Use:Fax.
e
Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only
,
MP Only
, MP>T1>T2
or T1>T2
.
1
The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the optional tray is installed.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
19
2
Chapter 2
Tray Use in print mode
You can change the default tray the machine will use for printing from your computer. a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Tray Setting.
Press Tray Setting.
d
Press a or b to display
Tray Use:Print
.
Press Tray Use:Print.
e
Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only
MP Only
, MP>T1>T2
.
1
The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the optional tray is installed.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
2
20
Acceptable paper and other print media
2
Print quality may vary according to the type of paper you are using.
You can use the following types of print media: thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper, glossy paper, labels or envelopes.
For best results, follow the instructions below:
DO NOT put different types of paper in the paper tray at the same time because it may cause paper jams or misfeeds.
For correct printing, you must choose the same paper size from your software application as the paper in the tray.
Avoid touching the printed surface of the paper immediately after printing.
Before you buy a lot of paper, test a small quantity to make sure the paper is suitable.
Loading paper
Recommended paper and print media
2
Paper Type
Plain paper
Item
Xerox Premier TCF 80 g/m
2
Xerox Business 80 g/m
2
Recycled Paper Xerox Recycled Supreme
80 g/m
2
Labels
Envelope
Glossy Paper
Avery laser label L7163
Antalis River series (DL)
International Paper Rey
Color Laser Gloss 140g/m
2
A4
Type and size of paper
The machine feeds paper from the installed standard paper tray, multi-purpose tray or optional lower tray.
2
The name for the paper trays in the printer driver in this Guide are as follows:
2
Tray and optional unit
Standard paper tray
Multi-purpose tray
Optional lower tray
Name
Tray 1
MP Tray
Tray 2
2
21
Chapter 2
Paper capacity of the paper trays
Paper Tray
(Tray 1)
Multi-purpose Tray
(MP Tray)
Optional Lower Tray
(Tray 2)
Paper size
A4, Letter, Legal, B5,
Executive, A5,
A5 (Long Edge), A6, B6,
Width: 69.8 to 216 mm
Length: 116 to 406.4 mm
A4, Letter, Legal, B5,
Executive, A5, B6,
Paper types
Plain paper, Thin paper and Recycled paper
Plain paper, Thin paper,
Thick paper,
Thicker paper,
Bond paper,
Recycled paper,
Envelopes, Labels and
Glossy paper
Plain paper, Thin paper and Recycled paper
No. of sheets
up to 250 [80 g/m
2
]
50 sheets [80 g/m
2
]
3 Envelopes
1 Glossy paper up to 500 [80 g/m
2
]
1
Folio size is 8.5 in.
× 13 in. (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm)
Recommended paper specifications
The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.
Basis weight
Thickness
Roughness
Stiffness
Grain direction
Volume resistivity
Surface resistivity
Filler
Ash content
Brightness
Opacity
75-90 g/m
2
80-110 μm
Higher than 20 sec.
90-150 cm
3
/100
Long grain
10e
9
-10e
11
ohm
10e
9
-10e
12
ohm-cm
CaCO
3
(Neutral)
Below 23 wt%
Higher than 80%
Higher than 85%
Use paper made for plain paper copying.
Use paper that is 75 to 90 g/m
2
.
Use long grain paper with a neutral Ph value, and a moisture content of approx. 5%.
This machine can use recycled paper that meets DIN 19309 specifications.
2
2
22
Handling and using special paper
2
The machine is designed to work well with most types of xerographic and bond paper.
However, some paper variables may have an effect on print quality or handling reliability.
Always test samples of paper before purchasing to ensure desirable performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct sunlight and heat.
Some important guidelines when selecting paper are:
DO NOT use inkjet paper because it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.
Preprinted paper must use ink that can withstand the temperature of the machine’s fusing process 200 degrees centigrade (392 degrees Fahrenheit).
If you use bond paper, paper having a rough surface or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit degraded performance.
When you are using glossy paper, put only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.
Loading paper
Types of paper to avoid
IMPORTANT
Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.
DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped
1
2
2
1
1 A curl of 2 mm or greater may cause jams to occur.
• that is coated or has a chemical finish
• that is damaged, creased or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• with letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed, they may damage your machine. This damage is not covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.
23
Chapter 2
Envelopes
Most envelopes designed for laser printers will be suitable for your machine. However, some envelopes may have feed and printquality problems because of the way they have been made. A suitable envelope should have edges with straight, well-creased folds and the leading edge should not be thicker than two sheets of paper. The envelope should lie flat and not be of baggy or flimsy construction. You should buy quality envelopes from a supplier who understands that you will be using the envelopes in a laser machine.
We recommend that you print a test envelope to make sure the print results are what you want.
2
Types of envelopes to avoid
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use envelopes:
• that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or an unusual shape
• that are extremely shiny or textured
• with clasps, staples, snaps or tie strings
• with self-adhesive closures
• that are of a baggy construction
• that are not sharply creased
• that are embossed (have raised writing on them)
• that were previously printed by a laser machine
• that are pre-printed on the inside
• that cannot be arranged neatly when stacked
• that are made of paper that weighs more than the paper weight specifications for the machine
• with edges that are not straight or consistently square
2
• with windows, holes, cut-outs or perforations
• with glue on surface as shown in figure below
• with double flaps as shown in figure below
• with sealing flaps that are not folded down when purchased
• with sealing flaps as shown in figure below
• with each side folded as shown in figure below
If you use any of the types of envelopes listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage may not be covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.
24
Labels
The machine will print on most types of labels designed for use with a laser machine. Labels should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based since this material is more stable at the high temperatures in the fuser unit. Adhesives should not come in contact with any part of the machine, because the label stock may stick to the drum unit or rollers and cause jams and print quality problems. No adhesive should be exposed between the labels.
Labels should be arranged so that they cover the entire length and width of the sheet. Using labels with spaces may result in labels peeling off and causing serious jams or print problems.
All labels used in this machine must be able to withstand a temperature of 200 degrees centigrade (392 degrees Fahrenheit) for a period of 0.1 seconds.
2
Types of labels to avoid
Do not use labels that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or an unusual shape.
2
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT feed part used label sheets. The exposed carrier sheet will damage your machine.
• Label sheets should not exceed the paper weight specifications described in this
User’s Guide. Labels exceeding this specification may not feed or print correctly and may cause damage to your machine.
• DO NOT reuse or insert labels that have previously been used or are missing a few labels on the sheet.
Loading paper
2
25
26
3
Loading documents
How to load documents
You can send a fax, make copies, and scan from the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) and the scanner glass.
3
Using the automatic document feeder (ADF)
The ADF can hold up to 50 pages and feeds each sheet individually. Use standard
80 g/m
2
paper and always fan the pages before putting them in the ADF.
3
Document Sizes Supported
3
Length: 147.3 to 356.0 mm
Width:
Weight:
147.3 to 215.9 mm
64 to 90 g/m
2
How to load documents
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paperclipped, pasted or taped.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or fabric.
• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.
3
Note
• To scan documents that are not suitable
for the ADF, see Using the scanner glass on page 27.
• It is easier to use the ADF if you are loading a multiple page document.
• Make sure documents with correction fluid or written with ink are completely dry.
a
Unfold the ADF document support (1).
Lift up and unfold the ADF document output support flap (2).
1
2 b
Fan the pages well.
c
Place your document face up top edge
first in the ADF until the LCD display message changes and you feel it touch the feed rollers.
d
Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the width of your document.
1
3
Note
• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.
• To scan non-standard documents, see
Using the scanner glass on page 27.
Using the scanner glass
3
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or scan pages of a book one page at a time.
Document Sizes Supported
3
Length: Up to 355.6 mm
Width: Up to 215.9 mm
Weight: Up to 2.0 kg
How to load documents
Note
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.
a
Lift the document cover.
3
Loading documents b
Using the document guidelines on the left and top, place the document face
down in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
3
c
Close the document cover.
IMPORTANT
If the document is a book or is thick, do not slam or press on the cover.
27
4
Sending a fax
How to send a fax
The following steps show how to send a fax.
a
When you want to send a fax, or change fax send or receive settings, press the
(FAX) key to illuminate it in blue.
4
FAX
The LCD shows:
Duplex Fax
Address Book
Off
Fax
Resolution
Standard b
Do one of the following to load your document:
Place the document face up in the
document feeder (ADF) on page 26.)
Load your document face down on
the scanner glass. (See Using the
Note
To send colour faxes with multiple pages use the ADF.
c
Set the scanner glass size, fax resolution or contrast if you want to change them.
Note
For more advanced fax sending operations and settings, see Sending a
fax in Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's
Guide:
• Broadcasting
• Duplex Fax (2-sided fax layout)
• Delayed Fax
• Batch TX
• Real Time TX
• Polled TX
• Overseas Mode
• Fax Resolution
• Contrast
• Glass ScanSize
• Coverpage Setup
• Coverpage Note
• Set New Default
• Factory Reset d
Choose one of the options below:
If you want to send a single-sided
If you want to send a 2-sided document, you need to choose the duplex scanning format of your
2-sided document.
Press Duplex Fax and choose
DuplexScan :LongEdge
or
DuplexScan :ShortEdge
.
Note
You can send 2-sided documents from the
ADF.
28
4
e
Enter the fax number using the dial pad.
You can also enter the fax number on the LCD by pressing Address Book and Send a fax, or you can press an
One Touch key on the machine’s control
panel. (For details, see How to dial on page 42.)
f
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Faxing from the ADF
The machine starts scanning the document.
Faxing from the scanner glass
If Real Time TX is On, the machine will send the document without asking if there are additional pages to scan.
If you press Mono Start, the machine starts scanning the first page.
Do one of the following:
• To send a single page, press No
(or press Mono Start again). The machine starts sending the document.
• To send more than one page, press Yes and place the next page on the scanner glass. Press
Mono Start. The machine starts scanning the page. (Repeat this step for each additional page.)
If you press Colour Start and
Yes (Color fax)
, the machine starts sending the document.
Note
To cancel, press Stop/Exit.
Sending a fax
Faxing Letter/Legal/Folio size documents from the scanner glass
4
When faxing Letter/Legal/Folio size documents, you will need to set the scan glass size to Letter or Legal/Folio; otherwise, a portion of your faxes will be missing.
a
Press b
Press d or c to display
Glass ScanSize
.
Press Glass ScanSize.
c
Press Letter or Legal/Folio.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can save the setting you use most often by setting it as the default. (See
Setting your changes as the new default in
Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide.)
4
29
Chapter 4
Colour fax transmission
Your machine can send a colour fax to machines that support this feature. Colour faxes cannot be stored in the machine's memory. When you send a colour fax, the machine will send it in real time (even if Real
Time TX is set to Off).
4
Cancelling a fax in progress
4
Press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax. If you press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialling or sending, the LCD will show
Cancel Job?
.
Press Yes to cancel the fax.
Transmission verification report
You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving party’s name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent, and whether or not the transmission was successful.
There are several settings available for the
Transmission Verification Report:
On
: Prints a report after every fax you send.
On+Image
: Prints a report after every fax you send. A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Off
: Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
Off is the default setting.
Off+Image
: Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Report Setting
.
Press Report Setting.
d
Press XMIT Report.
e
Press On, On+Image, Off or
Off+Image
.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
4
30
Note
• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image, the image will only appear on the
Transmission Verification Report if Real
Time Transmission is set to Off. (See
Real Time Transmission in Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide.)
• If your transmission is successful, OK will appear next to RESULT on the
Transmission Verification Report.
If transmission is not successful, ERROR will appear next to RESULT.
Sending a fax
4
31
32
5
Receiving a fax
Receive modes
You must choose a receive mode depending on the external devices and telephone services you have on your line.
5
Choosing the receive mode
By default, your machine will automatically receive any faxes that are sent to it. The diagrams below will help you choose the correct mode. (For more detailed information about the receive
modes, see Using receive modes on page 33.)
Do you want to use the telephone features of your machine (if available) or an external telephone or external telephone answering device connected on the same line as the machine?
Yes
Are you using the voice message function of an external telephone answering device?
No
No
Fax Only
Manual
No
Fax/Tel
Yes
External TAD
Yes
To set the receive mode follow the instructions below.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Receive Mode.
Press Receive Mode.
d
Press Fax Only, Fax/Tel, External TAD or Manual.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
The LCD will display the current receive mode.
5
5
Using receive modes
Some receive modes answer automatically
(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to change the Ring Delay before using these
modes. (See Ring Delay on page 34.)
5
Fax Only
Fax Only
mode will automatically answer every call as a fax.
5
Fax/Tel
Fax/Tel
mode helps you automatically manage incoming calls, by recognising whether they are fax or voice calls and dealing with them in one of the following ways:
Faxes will be automatically received.
Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast double-ring made by your machine.
(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) on page 34 and Ring Delay on page 34.)
5
Receiving a fax
Manual
Manual
mode turns off all automatic answering functions unless you are using the
feature.
1
BT Call Sign is for U.K. only.
To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the handset of the external telephone. When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press
Mono Start or Colour Start, and choose
Receive
to receive the fax. You can also use the Fax Detect feature to receive faxes by lifting a handset on the same line as the machine.
(Also see Fax Detect on page 35.)
5
External TAD
External TAD
mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls. Incoming calls will be dealt with in the following ways:
Faxes will be automatically received.
Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.
(For more information see Connecting an
5
5
33
Chapter 5
Receive Mode settings
5
Ring Delay
The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in
Fax Only
and Fax/Tel modes.
If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, choose the
maximum number of rings. (See Operation
from external or extension telephones
on page 39 and Fax Detect on page 35.)
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display Ring Delay.
Press Ring Delay.
e
Press the button on the LCD to choose how many times the line rings before the machine answers.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
5
F/T Ring Time
(Fax/Tel mode only)
When somebody calls your machine, you and your caller will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set by the Ring
Delay setting.
If the call is a fax, then your machine will receive it; however, if it is a voice call the machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast double-ring) for the time you have set in the
F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the F/T ring it means that you have a voice caller on the line.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can still answer the call on any telephone. (For more information see
Using Remote Codes on page 41.)
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display
F/T Ring Time
.
Press F/T Ring Time.
e
Press how long the machine will ring to alert you that you have a voice call (20,
30, 40 or 70 seconds).
f
Press Stop/Exit.
5
34
Fax Detect
If Fax Detect is On:
The machine can receive a fax automatically, even if you answer the call. When you see
Receiving
on the LCD or hear a click on the phone line through the handset you are using, just replace the handset. Your machine will do the rest.
5
If Fax Detect is Off:
If you are at the machine and answer a fax call first by lifting the external handset, then press Mono Start or Colour Start, and then press Receive to receive the Fax.
If you answered at an extension telephone
press l51. (See Operation from external or
extension telephones on page 39.)
5
Note
• If this feature is set to On, but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension telephone handset, press the fax receive code l51.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set Fax Detect to Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display Fax Detect.
Press Fax Detect.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Receiving a fax
5
35
36
6
Telephone and external devices
6
Telephone line services
Setting the telephone line type
If you are connecting the machine to a line that features a PBX or ISDN to send and receive faxes, it is necessary to change the
Telephone Line Type accordingly by completing the following steps. If you are using a line that features a PBX, you can set your machine so that it always accesses the outside line (using the prefix you entered), or accesses the outside line when Tel/R is pressed.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup
.
Press Initial Setup.
c
Press a or b to display
Phone Line Set
.
Press Phone Line Set.
d
Press PBX, ISDN (or Normal).
e
Do one of the following:
If you chose ISDN or Normal, go to
If you chose PBX, go to step f.
f
Press On or Always.
Note
• If you choose On, pressing Tel/R will let you access an outside line.
• If you choose Always, you can access an outside line without pressing Tel/R.
6
6
g
Do one of the following:
If you want to change the current prefix number, press Dial Prefix
If you do not want to change the
current prefix number, go to step i.
h
Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits) on the dial pad.
Press OK.
Note
You can use the numbers and symbols 0 to 9, #, l and !. (You cannot use ! with any other numbers and symbols.) i
Press Stop/Exit.
PBX and TRANSFER
The machine is initially set to Normal, which lets the machine connect to a standard PSTN
(Public Switched Telephone Network) line.
However, many offices use a central telephone system or Private Branch
Exchange (PBX). Your machine can be connected to most types of PBX. The machine’s recall feature supports timed break recall only (TBR). TBR will work with most
PBX systems allowing you to gain access to an outside line, or transfer calls to another extension. The feature works when Tel/R is pressed.
6
Connecting an external
TAD
6
You can connect an external Telephone
Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the TAD answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine.
If it hears them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice message and the display will show Telephone.
The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend you set it to two rings).
This is because your machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it.
Telephone and external devices
Connections
The external TAD must be connected as shown in the illustration below.
1
6
1
(Example for U.K.)
1 TAD
a
Set your external TAD to one or two rings. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.) b
Record the outgoing message on your external TAD.
c
Set the TAD to answer calls.
d
Set the Receive Mode to
External TAD
6
Note
If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the ring delay setting on your external TAD.
37
Chapter 6
Recording an outgoing message (OGM)
a
Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for fax tones.
b
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
c
End your 20-second message by giving your Remote Activation code for people sending manual faxes. For example:
“After the beep, leave a message or press l51 and Start to send a fax.”
Note
• You need to turn the Remote Codes setting to on to use the Fax Activation
Code l51. (See Using Remote Codes on page 41.)
• We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5 second silence because the machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving, then you should re-record the OGM to include it.
6
Multi-line connections (PBX)
6
We suggest you ask the company who installed your PBX to connect your machine.
If you have a multi line system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the machine being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls will be answered by a switchboard operator we recommend that you set the Receive Mode to Manual.
We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate properly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company who handles your PBX.
38
External and extension telephones
Note
You need to turn the Remote Codes setting to on to use the Remote Activation
Code l51 and Remote Deactivation Code
#51. (See Using Remote Codes on page 41.)
Connecting an external or extension telephone
6
You can connect a separate telephone directly to your machine as shown in the diagram below.
1
2
(Example for U.K.)
1 Extension telephone
2 External telephone
When you are using an external telephone, the LCD shows Telephone.
Operation from external or extension telephones
If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone, or an external telephone that is correctly connected to the machine through the T-piece connection, you can make your machine take the call by using the Remote
Activation code. When you press the Remote
Activation code l51 the machine starts to receive the fax.
6
6
Telephone and external devices
If you answer a call and no one is on the line:
6
You should assume that you’re receiving a manual fax.
Press l51 and wait for the chirp or until the
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.
Note
You can also use the Fax Detect feature to make your tactically take the call. (See
For Fax/Tel mode only
6
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring Time (fast double-ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.
Lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press Tel/R to answer.
If you are at an extension telephone, you will need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring
Time and then press #51 between the fast double-ringings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by pressing l51.
Using extension telephones
(U.K. only)
6
Your premises may already be wired with parallel extension telephones (those connected to sockets in other rooms in the building), or perhaps you intend to add extension telephones to your line. While the simplest arrangement is a parallel connection, there are some reasons why this arrangement may cause problems.
The most common problem, is someone picking up an extension telephone while the machine is trying to send a fax.
6
39
Chapter 6
Such problems can easily be eliminated, if you arrange modification of your extension wiring circuit, such that extension devices are connected “downstream” of your machine, in a master/slave configuration (see figure 2). In such a configuration, this machine can always detect whether a telephone is in use, so it will not attempt to seize the line during that time. This is known as “telephone off-hook detection”.
The inadvisable configuration is shown in figure 1, and the recommended master/slave configuration is shown in figure 2.
This new connection configuration can be arranged by contacting BT, Kingston upon
Hull Telecommunications, your PBX maintainer or a qualified telephone installation company as appropriate. Simply explained, the extension telephone circuit should be terminated on a normal modular plug (BT 431A style), which in turn should be inserted into the modular socket of the white
“T”-shaped connector provided as part of the line cord assembly.
Figure 1:
1 1 2
3
6
Figure 2: Recommended connection of extension sockets
1 1 2
3
6
FAX
(Example for U.K.)
1 Extension socket
2 Master socket
3 Incoming line
These phones are now connected as external
devices as shown on page 39, because they
are connected to the fax machine via the
T-connector.
Using a non-Brother cordless external handset
6
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the telephone line cord (see
page 39) and you typically carry the cordless
handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you will have to go to the machine so you can press
Tel/R to transfer the call to the cordless handset.
1 Extension socket
2 Master socket
3 Incoming line
FAX
(Example for U.K.)
40
Using Remote Codes
Remote Activation Code
If you answer a fax call on an external or extension telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing the Remote
Activation Code l51. Wait for the chirping
sounds then replace the handset. (See Fax
Detect on page 35.) Your caller will have to
press start to send the fax.
6
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Remote Deactivation Code
If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T (fast double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51
(make sure you press this between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and fast double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the external telephone by pressing Tel/R.
6
Turning on the Remote Codes
You need to turn the Remote Codes setting to on to use the Fax Receive Code and
Telephone Answer Code.
6
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display Remote Codes.
Press Remote Codes.
e
Press On.
6
Telephone and external devices f
If you do not want to change the Remote
Activation Code, press on the LCD.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Changing the Remote Codes
The preset Remote Activation Code is l51.
The preset Remote Deactivation Code is #51.
If you are always disconnected when accessing your External TAD, try changing the three-digit remote codes, for example ### and 555.
6
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display Remote Codes.
Press Remote Codes.
e
Press On or Off.
f
If you chose On in step e, enter the new
Remote Activation Code.
Press OK.
g
Enter the new Remote Deactivation
Code.
Press OK.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
6
41
42
7
Dialling and storing numbers
How to dial
You can dial in any of the following ways.
7
Manual dialling
Use the dial pad to enter all the digits of the telephone or fax number.
7
Speed dialling
a
Press Address Book.
b
Press the three-digit number you want to call. You can also display the numbers in alphabetical order by pressing on the Touchscreen.
c
Press Send a fax or
Send a E-mail
.
d
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Note
If the LCD shows Not Registered when you enter or search a Speed Dial number, a number has not been stored at this location.
7
One Touch dialling
Press the One Touch key that stores the
number you want to call. (See Storing
One Touch Dial numbers on page 46.)
7
7
To dial One Touch numbers 21 to 40, hold down 21-40 as you press the One Touch key.
Search
You can search alphabetically for names you have stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial
memories. (See Storing One Touch Dial
numbers on page 46 and Storing Speed Dial
a
Press Address Book.
b
Press on the Touchscreen.
c
Press the first few letters of the name on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
d
Press a or b to scroll until you find the name you are looking for.
Press the name you are looking for.
e
Press Send a fax or
Send a E-mail
.
f
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Note
• If the LCD shows
Results cannot be found.
when you enter the first few letters of the name, it means that a name for the letter is not stored.
• One Touch Dial number and Speed Dial numbers stored without the name cannot be retrieved by the search function.
LDAP search
7
If the machine is connected to your LDAP server, you can search for information such as fax numbers and E-mail addresses from your server. (For details about how to set up
LDAP see the Network User's Guide.)
7
Dialling and storing numbers
Fax redial
If you are sending a fax automatically and the line is busy, the machine will automatically redial up to three times at five minute intervals.
If you are sending a fax manually and the line is busy, press Redial/Pause and try it again.
You can call the last number dialled, by pressing Redial/Pause.
Redial/Pause only works if you dialled from the control panel.
7
7
43
Chapter 7
Storing numbers
You can set up your machine to do the following types of easy dialling: One Touch,
Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting faxes. You can also specify the default resolution for each One Touch and Speed
Dial number. When you dial a quick dial number, the LCD shows the name, if you stored it, or the number. A scan profile can also be stored along with the fax number.
If you lose electrical power, the quick dial numbers stored in the memory will not be lost.
A scan profile is the resolution and other scan settings that you choose when you store a number.
7
Storing a pause
Press Pause to insert a 2.8-second pause between numbers. You can press Pause as many times as needed to increase the length of the pause.
7
44
Dialling and storing numbers
One Touch and Speed Dial Storage Options
The following chart shows the selections for the settings for One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
When you store numbers, the LCD instructs you to choose from the options shown in the following steps.
7
Step 1
Enter Name
Enter the name you want to store or
Press OK
Step 2
Select Registration
Type
Fax
IFAX
E-Mail Color PDF
E-Mail Color JPEG
E-Mail Color XPS
E-Mail Gray PDF
E-Mail Gray JPEG
E-Mail Gray XPS
E-Mail B&W PDF
E-Mail B&W TIFF
Step 3
Enter Number or
E-mail Address
Enter the Fax
Number
Enter the E-mail
Address
Step 4
Select Resolution
Standard
S.Fine
Standard
Photo
200 dpi
,
, Fine,
, Photo
100 dpi
300 dpi
, Fine,
, 200 dpi,
, 600 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
, 600 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
, 600 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
-
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
200 dpi
,
200 x 100 dpi
200 x 100 dpi
-
-
-
-
Step 5
Select File type
-
, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
,
Signed PDF
-
, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
,
Signed PDF
, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
,
Signed PDF
Note
• If you choose Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine using Web Based
Management. Choose Configure Signed PDF Settings from Administrator Settings in
Web Based Management. For how to install a certificate, see the Network User's Guide.
• PDF/A is a PDF file format intended for long-term archiving. This format contains all the necessary information to be able to reproduce the document after long-term storage.
• A Signed PDF helps prevent data tampering and the impersonation of an author by including a digital certificate within the document.
7
45
Chapter 7
Storing One Touch Dial numbers
Your machine has 20 One Touch keys where you can store 40 fax or telephone numbers or
E-mail addresses for automatic dialling. To access numbers 21 to 40, hold down 21-40 as you press the One Touch key.
7
a
Press the One Touch key where you want to store the number or E-mail address.
If a number or E-mail address is not stored there, the LCD shows
Not Registered
Register Now?
.
Press Yes.
Or, you can use the LCD buttons by pressing Address Book, More and
Set One Touch Dial
, and then enter the number of the One Touch key where you want to store the number or
E-mail address and press OK.
Note
If the One Touch number you choose is already taken, the OK button on the LCD will not work. Choose a different number.
b
Do one of the following:
Enter the name (up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen. Use the chart on
Entering text on page 183 to help
you enter letters.
Press OK.
Press OK to store the number or
E-mail address without a name.
c
Press d or c to select
Fax
,
IFAX
,
E-Mail B&W PDF
,
E-Mail B&W TIFF
,
E-Mail Color PDF
,
E-Mail Color JPEG
,
E-Mail Color XPS
,
E-Mail Gray PDF
,
E-Mail Gray JPEG
or
E-Mail Gray XPS
.
d
Enter the telephone, fax number (up to
20 characters each) or E-mail address
(up to 60 characters each). Use the
chart on Entering text on page 183 to
help you enter letters.
Press OK.
Note
• If you selected an E-mail Registration
Type in step c and save the E-mail
address, you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Scan mode.
• If you selected the IFAX Registration Type
in step c and save the E-mail address,
you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Fax mode.
46
e
To save a fax/scan resolution along with the number/E-mail address, go to the appropriate step as shown in the following table.
Fax
IFAX
E-Mail Color PDF
E-Mail Color JPEG
E-Mail Color XPS
E-Mail Gray PDF
E-Mail Gray JPEG
E-Mail Gray XPS
E-Mail B&W PDF
E-Mail B&W TIFF
Go to step
Note
• When you do a broadcast and you have saved a scan profile along with the number or E-mail address, the scan profile of the One Touch, Speed Dial or Group number you chose first will be applied to the broadcast.
• For details about the file format, see Using
the Scan key in the Software User's
Guide.
f
Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine
, S.Fine or Photo and go to
g
Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine
h
Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi
, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.
If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,
If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG or E-Mail Color XPS, go to
Dialling and storing numbers i
Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi
or 300 dpi.
If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go
If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or
E-Mail Gray XPS
j
Select the resolution from 200 dpi or
200 x 100 dpi
.
If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go
If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go
k
Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
or Signed PDF that will be used to send to your PC.
Note
If you choose Secure PDF, the machine will ask you to enter a fou-digit password using numbers 0-9 before it starts scanning.
l
When the LCD displays your settings, press OK to confirm.
m
Press Stop/Exit.
7
47
Chapter 7
Storing Speed Dial numbers
7
You can store your frequently used numbers as Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial you will only have to press a few keys (for example: press Address Book, the number you want to call and Send a fax). The machine can store 300 Speed Dial numbers
(001-300).
a
Press Address Book.
b
Press More.
c
Press Set Speed Dial.
d
Do one of the following:
Enter the name (up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen. Use the chart on
Entering text on page 183 to help
you enter letters.
Press OK.
Press OK to store the number or
E-mail address without a name.
e
Press d or c to select
Fax
,
IFAX
,
E-Mail B&W PDF
,
E-Mail B&W TIFF
,
E-Mail Color PDF
,
E-Mail Color JPEG
,
E-Mail Color XPS
,
E-Mail Gray PDF
,
E-Mail Gray JPEG
or
E-Mail Gray XPS
.
f
Enter the fax/telephone number (up to
20 characters each) or E-mail address
(up to 60 characters each). Use the
chart on Entering text on page 183 to
help you enter letters.
Press OK.
Note
• If you selected an E-mail Registration
Type in step e and save the E-mail
address, you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Scan mode.
• If you selected the IFAX Registration Type
in step e and save the E-mail address,
you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Fax mode.
g
To save a fax/scan resolution along with the number/E-mail address, go to the appropriate step as shown in the following table.
Fax
IFAX
E-Mail Color PDF
E-Mail Color JPEG
E-Mail Color XPS
E-Mail Gray PDF
E-Mail Gray JPEG
E-Mail Gray XPS
E-Mail B&W PDF
E-Mail B&W TIFF
Go to step
Note
• When you do a broadcast and you have saved a scan profile along with the number or E-mail address, the scan profile of the One Touch, Speed Dial or Group number you chose first will be applied to the broadcast.
• For details about the file format, see the
Software User's Guide.
h
Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine
, S.Fine or Photo and go to
i
Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine
48
j
Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi
, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.
If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,
If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG or E-Mail Color XPS, go to
k
Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi
or 300 dpi.
If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go
If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or
E-Mail Gray XPS
l
Select the resolution from 200 dpi or
200 x 100 dpi
.
If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go
If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go
m
Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
or Signed PDF that will be used to send to your PC.
Note
If you choose Secure PDF, the machine will ask you to enter a four-digit password using numbers 0-9 before it starts scanning.
n
Enter a three-digit Speed Dial location number (001-300).
Press OK.
o
When the LCD displays your settings, press OK to confirm.
p
Press Stop/Exit.
Dialling and storing numbers
Changing or Deleting One
Touch and Speed Dial numbers
You can change or delete a One Touch or
Speed Dial number that has already been stored.
If the stored number has a scheduled job, such as a delayed fax or a fax forwarding number, it will be dimmed on the LCD. You cannot select the number to make changes or to delete it unless you first cancel the scheduled job. (See Checking and canceling
waiting jobs in chapter 3 of the Advanced
User's Guide.) a
Press Address Book.
b
Press More.
c
Do one of the following:
Press Change to edit the name, number or E-mail address and go to
Press Delete to delete all information in a Speed Dial or One
Touch number.
Select the number you want to delete by pressing it to display a red check mark.
Press OK.
When Erase This Data? appears, press Yes to accept it.
d
Press a or b to display the number you want to change.
Press the number you want to change.
Note
One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.
7
7
49
Chapter 7 e
Press Name:
Number/Address:
Resolution:
or
PDF Type: f
Do one of the following:
If you chose Name:, enter the name
(up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
If you chose Number/Address:, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) or E-mail address (up to 60 digits) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
If you chose Resolution:, press one of the available resolution options displayed on the
Touchscreen.
If you chose PDF Type:, press one of the available file type options displayed on the Touchscreen.
Note
How to change the stored name or number:
If you want to change a character, press d or c to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then press . Re-enter the character.
The LCD will display your new setting.
g
Do one of the following:
To finish changing, press OK.
To change more details, go to
h
Press Stop/Exit.
Tone or Pulse
If you have a Pulse dialling service, but need to send Tone signals (for example, for telephone banking), follow the instructions below. If you have Touch Tone service, you will not need this feature to send tone signals.
a
Lift the handset of the external telephone.
b
Press # on the machine’s control panel.
Any digits dialled after this will send tone signals.
When you hang up, the machine will return to the Pulse dialling service.
7
50
8
Making copies
8
How to copy
The following steps show the basic copy operation. For details about each option, see the Advanced User's Guide.
a
When you want to make a copy, press
(COPY) to illuminate it in blue.
Make sure you are in Copy mode.
Copy
The LCD shows:
Quality
Auto
Enlarge/
Reduce
100%
Favorite
Duplex Copy
Off
You can enter the number of copies you want by pressing the + and - buttons on the Touchscreen.
Note
The default setting is Fax mode. You can change the amount of time that the machine stays in Copy mode after the last copy operation. (See Mode Timer in
Chapter 1 of the Advanced User's Guide.) b
Do one of the following to load your document:
Place the document face up in the
document feeder (ADF) on page 26.)
Load your document face down on
the scanner glass. (See Using the
8
c
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Note
If the LCD shows Please Wait and the machine stops copying while you are making multiple copies, please wait for 30 to 40 seconds until the machine finishes the colour registrations and cleaning process of the belt unit.
Stop copying
8
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.
Copy settings
Press COPY and then press d or c to choose the setting you want. For details about changing the copy settings, see Copy
settings in Chapter 7 of the Advanced User's
Guide.
You can change the following copy settings:
Quality
Enlarge/Reduce
Duplex Copy
Tray Use
Brightness
Contrast
Stack / Sort
Page Layout
2in1(ID)
Color Adjust
(Saturation)
Set New Default
Factory Reset
Favorite Settings
Favorite
8
8
51
52
9
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage
9
With the Direct Print feature, you do not need a computer to print data. You can print by just plugging your USB Flash memory drive into the machine’s USB direct interface. You can also connect and print directly from a camera set to USB mass storage mode.
Note
• Some USB Flash memory drives may not work with the machine.
• If your camera is in PictBridge mode, you cannot print data. Please refer to the documentation supplied with your camera to switch from PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.
Creating a PRN or
PostScript
®
3™ file for direct printing
9
Note
The screens in this section may vary depending on your application and operating system.
a
From the menu bar of an application, click File, then Print.
b
Choose Brother MFC-XXXX Printer (1) and check the Print to file box (2).
Click Print.
1
2 c
Choose the folder you want to save the file to and enter the file name if you are prompted to.
If you are prompted for a file name only, you can also specify the folder you want to save the file in by entering the directory name. For example:
C:\Temp\FileName.prn
If you have a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB Flash memory drive.
Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage
9
a
Connect your USB Flash memory drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface (1) on the front of the machine.
Press Direct Print. Your machine will enter Direct Print Mode.
1
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage
1
Note
• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.
• If your machine has been set to Secure
Function Lock On, you may not be able to access Direct Print. (For explanations about error messages that may occur, see
Switching Users in chapter 2 of the
Advanced User's Guide.) b
Press a or b to choose the folder name and file name you want to print.
If you have chosen the folder name, press a or b to choose the file name you want to print.
Note
• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.
• If you want to print an index of the files, press Index Print on the
Touchscreen. Press Mono Start or
Colour Start to print the data.
• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the LCD does not show any information even if you connect a USB flash memory drive to the USB direct interface. Press the Touchscreen or any key to wake up the machine. Press
Direct Print
on the Touchscreen, the
LCD will show the Direct Print menu.
c
Choose the number of copies you want by pressing the + and - buttons on the
Touchscreen.
d
Do one of the following:
Press Print Settings. Go to
If you do not need to change the current default settings, go to
9
53
Chapter 9 e
Press a or b to display an option setting you need to change.
Press the option and change the setting.
Note
• You can choose the following settings:
Paper Size
Paper Type
Multiple Page
Orientation
Duplex
Collate
Tray Use
Print Quality
PDF Option
• Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.
f
Do one of the following:
If you want to change other option
If you do not want to change any other options, press
and go to g
Press Mono Start or Colour Start to print the data.
IMPORTANT
• To prevent damage to your machine, DO
NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB Flash memory drive to the USB direct interface.
• DO NOT remove the USB Flash memory drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine has finished printing.
Changing the default settings for direct print
9
You can change the default settings for Direct
Print.
a
Connect your USB Flash memory drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface on the front of the machine.
b
Press Direct Print on the LCD.
c
Press Default Settings.
d
Press a or b to display the setting you want to change.
Press the setting.
e
Press the new option you want. Repeat
steps d to e for each setting you want
to change.
Note
How to display all available options:
When the LCD displays the d and c buttons, press d or c to display all available options.
54
10
How to print from a computer
Printing a document
The machine can receive data from your computer and print it. To print from a computer, install the printer driver. (See
Printing for Windows
®
or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User's Guide for the details about the print settings.) a
Install the Brother printer driver on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.) b
From your application, choose the Print command.
c
Choose the name of your machine in the
Print dialog box and click Properties.
d
Choose the settings you want in the
Properties dialog box.
Paper Size
Orientation
Copies
Media Type
Print Quality
Colour / Mono
Multiple Page
Duplex / Booklet
Paper Source
Click OK.
e
Click OK to begin printing.
10
10
10
55
56
11
How to scan to a computer
Scanning a document
11
There are several ways to scan documents.
You can use the (SCAN) key on the machine or the scanner drivers on your computer.
a
To use the machine as a scanner, install a scanner driver. If the machine is on a
Network, configure it with a TCP/IP address.
Install the scanner drivers on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide and Scanning in the
Software User's Guide.)
Configure the machine with a TCP/IP address if network scanning does not work. (See Configuring Network
Scanning in the Software User's
Guide.) b
Load your document. (See How to load
Use the ADF to scan multiple pages of documents. The ADF feeds each sheet automatically.
Use the scanner glass to scan a page of a book or one sheet at a time.
c
Do one of the following:
To scan using the (SCAN)
key, go to Scanning using the scan
To scan using a scanner driver at
your computer, go to Scanning using
Scanning using the scan key
For more information, see Using the Scan
key in the Software User's Guide.
a
Press the (SCAN) key.
b
Choose the scan mode you want.
Scan to:
USB
Network
FTP
(Server)
Image
OCR
File
1
(Macintosh users)
Presto! PageManager must be downloaded
and installed before use. See Accessing
Brother Support (Macintosh) on page 4 for
further instructions.
c
(For network users)
Choose the computer you want to send the data to.
d
Press Mono Start or Colour Start to begin scanning.
11
11
Scanning using a scanner driver
For more information, see Scanning a
document using the TWAIN driver, Scanning
a document using the WIA driver or Scanning
a document using the ICA driver in the
Software User's Guide.
a
Start a scanning application and click the Scan button.
b
Adjust the settings such as Resolution,
Brightness, and Scan Type in the
Scanner Setup dialog box.
c
Click Start or Scan to begin scanning.
11
How to scan to a computer
11
57
58
A
Routine maintenance
Replacing the consumable items
The following messages appear on the LCD in the Ready mode. These messages provide advanced warnings to replace the consumable items before they reach the end of their life. To avoid any inconvenience, you may want to buy spare consumable items before the machine stops printing.
A
Toner cartridge
See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.
Model Name: TN-320BK, TN-325BK, TN-328BK,
TN-320C, TN-325C, TN-328C, TN-320M, TN-325M,
TN-328M, TN-320Y, TN-325Y, TN-328Y,
Drum unit
See Replacing the drum unit on page 68.
Model Name: DR-320CL
A
Belt unit
See Replacing the belt unit on page 74.
Model Name: BU-300CL
Waste toner box
See Replacing the waste toner box on page 80.
Model Name: WT-300CL
Routine maintenance
LCD messages
Toner Low
Prepare New
Toner
Cartridge.X
Consumable item to replace
Toner cartridge
X = Black, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow
Approximate life How to replace
<Black>
2,500 pages
4,000 pages
6,000 pages
<Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow>
1,500 pages
3,500 pages
6,000 pages
Replace Parts
WT Box End Soon
Waste toner box
3
4
1
2
5
A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Standard toner cartridge
High capacity toner cartridge
Super high capacity toner cartridge
Model name
TN-320BK
TN-325BK
TN-325C
TN-328BK
TN-320C
TN-328C
,
TN-320Y
TN-325Y
TN-328Y
,
,
WT-300CL
A
59
You will need to clean the machine regularly and replace the consumable items when the following messages are displayed on the LCD.
LCD messages Consumable item to replace
Replace TonerX
Toner cartridge
X = Black, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow
Approximate life How to replace
<Black>
<Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow>
Model name
Replace Parts
Drum Unit
Drum unit
Drum Stop
Replace Parts
Belt Unit
Belt unit
Replace WT Box
Waste toner box
Replace Parts
Fuser Unit
Fuser unit
Replace Parts
Laser Unit
Laser unit
Replace Parts
PF Kit 1
Paper feeding kit 1
Replace Parts
PF Kit 2
Paper feeding kit 2
Replace Parts
PF Kit MP
Paper feeding kit
MP
100,000 pages
100,000 pages
100,000 pages
100,000 pages
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
1 page per job.
Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
Standard toner cartridge
High capacity toner cartridge
Super high capacity toner cartridge
BU-300CL
WT-300CL
Call your Brother dealer for a replacement fuser unit.
Call your Brother dealer for a replacement laser unit.
Call your Brother dealer for a replacement paper feeding kit 1.
Call your Brother dealer for a replacement paper feeding kit 2.
Call your Brother dealer for a replacement paper feeding kit MP.
TN-320BK
TN-325BK
TN-328BK
,
TN-320M
TN-325M
TN-328M
TN-320Y
,
,
TN-325Y
TN-328Y
DR-320CL
60
Routine maintenance
Note
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/index.html for instructions on how to return your used consumable items to the Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.
(See EU Directive 2002/96/EC and EN 50419 in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)
• We recommend placing used consumable items on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally spilling or scattering the material inside.
• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.
• The projected life of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of replacement will vary depending on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage and type of media used.
61
A
Replacing a Toner cartridge
A
Model Name: For the model name of toner
cartridges, see Replacing the consumable
The Standard toner cartridges can print approximately 2,500 pages (black) or approximately 1,500 pages (cyan, magenta,
. The High Yield toner cartridges can print approximately 4,000 pages (black) or approximately 3,500 pages (cyan, magenta,
. The Super High Yield toner cartridges can print approximately 6,000
pages (black, cyan, magenta, yellow)
.
Actual page count will vary depending on your average type of document. When a toner cartridge is running low, the LCD shows
Toner Low
.
The toner cartridges that come supplied with the machine are standard toner cartridges.
1
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Note
• It is a good idea to keep a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the
Toner Low
warning.
• To ensure high quality printing, we recommend that you use only Brother
Original toner cartridges. When you want to buy toner cartridges, please call your
Brother dealer.
• We recommend that you clean the machine when you replace the toner
cartridge. See Cleaning and Checking the
• If you change the print density setting for lighter or darker printing, the amount of toner used will change.
• Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until immediately before you put it into the machine.
Toner Low
If the LCD shows Toner Low
Prepare New Toner Cartridge.X
, buy a new toner cartridge and have it ready before you get a Replace Toner message.
The LCD shows the toner colour that is near the end of its life (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or
Black).
A
Replace Toner
When the LCD shows Replace Toner the machine will stop printing until you replace the toner cartridge. The message on the LCD will indicate which colour you need to replace.
A new or unused Brother Original toner cartridge will reset the Replace Toner mode.
A
62
Replacing the toner cartridges
a
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
A
b
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
Routine maintenance c
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
63
A
d
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it toward the machine to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat, level, stable surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.
64
WARNING
DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It could explode, resulting in injuries.
DO NOT use cleaning materials that contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of spray or any type of flammable substance to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
See To use the product safely in the Safety
and Legal Booklet for how to clean the machine.
Note
• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge tightly in a suitable bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge.
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/ index.html for instructions on how to return your used consumable items to the
Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office. (See EU Directive 2002/96/EC and
EN 50419 in the Safety and Legal Booklet)
Be careful not to inhale toner.
e
Push to release the latches of the corona wire cover (1), and then open the cover.
Routine maintenance f
Clean the corona wires inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tabs from left to right and right to left several times.
1
1
Note
Be sure to return the tab to the home position (a) (1). If you do not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
A
65
g
Close the corona wire cover.
i
Unpack the new toner cartridge. Gently shake it from side to side several times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
h
Repeat steps e to g to clean each of
three remaining corona wires.
IMPORTANT
• Unpack the toner cartridge just before you put it in the machine. If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.
• If an unpacked drum unit is put in direct sunlight or room light, the unit may be damaged.
• Brother machines are designed to work with toner of a particular specification and will work to a level of optimum performance when used with Brother
Original toner cartridges. Brother cannot guarantee this optimum performance if toner or toner cartridges of other specifications are used. Brother does not therefore recommend the use of cartridges other than Brother Original cartridges with this machine, or the refilling of empty cartridges with toner from other sources. If damage is caused to the drum unit or other part of this machine as a result of the use of toner or toner cartridges other than Brother Original products due to the incompatibility or lack of suitability of those products with this machine, any repairs required as a result may not be covered by the warranty.
66
j
Pull off the protective cover.
IMPORTANT
Put the toner cartridge in the drum unit immediately after you have removed the protective cover. To prevent any degradation to the print quality, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Routine maintenance k
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
C
M
Y
K
A
C - Cyan
Y - Yellow
M - Magenta
K - Black
67
l
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
m
Close the front cover of the machine.
Note
After you replace a toner cartridge, DO
NOT turn off the machine's power switch or open the front cover until the LCD clears the Please Wait message and returns to Ready mode.
Replacing the drum unit
Model name: DR-320CL
A new drum unit can print approximately
25,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.
A
IMPORTANT
For best performance, use a Brother
Original drum unit and Brother Original toner units. Printing with a third-party drum unit or toner unit may reduce not only the print quality but also the quality and life of the machine itself. Warranty coverage may not apply to problems caused by the use of a third-party drum unit or toner unit.
Drum Error
The corona wires have become dirty. Clean the corona wires in the drum unit. (See
Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)
If you cleaned the corona wires and
Drum Error
was not cleared then the drum unit is at the end of its life. Replace the drum unit with a new one.
A
Replace Parts
Drum
The drum unit has exceeded its rated life.
Please replace the drum unit with a new one.
We recommend a Brother Original drum unit be installed at this time.
After replacement, reset the drum counter by following the instructions included with the new drum unit.
A
Drum Stop
We cannot guarantee the print quality. Please replace the drum unit with a new one. We recommend a Brother Original drum unit be installed at this time.
A
After replacement, reset the drum counter by following the instructions included with the new drum unit.
68
Replacing the drum unit
IMPORTANT
• While removing the drum unit, handle it carefully because it may contain toner. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.
• Every time you replace the drum unit, clean the inside of the machine. (See
Cleaning and Checking the machine on page 87.)
A
a
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
b
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
Routine maintenance c
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
A
69
d
Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
1
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
70
e
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
Routine maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
WARNING
DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It could explode, resulting in injuries.
DO NOT use cleaning materials that contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of spray, or any type of flammable substance to clean the outside or inside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
See To use the product safely in the Safety
and Legal Booklet for how to clean the machine.
Be careful not to inhale toner.
Note
• Be sure to seal up the used drum unit tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the unit.
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/ index.html for instructions on how to return your used consumable items to the
Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office. (See EU Directive 2002/96/EC and
EN 50419 in the Safety and Legal Booklet)
A
71
f
Unpack the new drum unit and remove the protective cover.
g
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the new drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
IMPORTANT
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Y
K
C
M
C - Cyan
Y - Yellow
M - Magenta
K - Black
• Unpack the drum unit just before you put it in the machine. Exposure to direct sunlight or room light may damage the drum unit.
72
h
Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.
Routine maintenance j
Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.
1
1
k
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
i
Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
1
2
A
l
Close the front cover of the machine.
73
Resetting the drum counter
When you replace a drum unit with a new one, you will need to reset the drum counter by completing the following steps:
A
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Machine Info.
.
Press Machine Info..
c
Press Reset Menu.
d
Press Drum.
e
The machine will display
Reset Drum?
.
f
Press Yes, and then press Stop/Exit.
Replacing the belt unit
Model name: BU-300CL
A new belt unit can print approximately
50,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.
A
Replace Parts
Belt Unit
When the Replace Parts Belt Unit message appears on the LCD, you will need to replace the belt unit:
A
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT touch the surface of the belt unit.
If you touch it, it could degrade print quality.
• Damage caused by incorrect handling of the belt unit may void your warranty.
a
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
74
b
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
Routine maintenance c
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
75
A
d
Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
1
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
76
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Routine maintenance e
Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.
A
f
Unpack the new belt unit.
77
g
Put the new belt unit back in the machine. Make sure the belt unit is level and fits firmly into place.
h
Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.
1
i
Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
1
2
78
j
Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.
1
k
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
Routine maintenance
Resetting the belt unit counter
When you replace a belt unit with a new one, you will need to reset the belt unit counter by completing the following steps:
A
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Machine Info.
.
Press Machine Info..
c
Press Reset Menu.
d
Press Belt Unit.
e
The machine will display Reset Belt
Unit?
.
f
Press Yes, and then press Stop/Exit.
A
l
Close the front cover of the machine.
79
Replacing the waste toner box
A
Model name: WT-300CL
A new waste toner box can print approximately 50,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.
Replace Parts
WT Box End Soon
If the LCD shows Replace Parts
WT Box End Soon
, it means the waste toner box is near the end of its life. Buy a new waste toner box and have it ready before you get a Replace WT Box message.
A
Replace WT Box
When the Replace WT Box message appears on the LCD, you will need to replace the waste toner box:
A
WARNING
DO NOT put the waste toner box into a fire.
It could explode.
Be careful not to spill the toner. DO NOT inhale or allow it to get into your eyes.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.
a
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
b
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
80
c
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
Routine maintenance d
Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
1
81
A
82
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
e
Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.
Routine maintenance f
Remove the two pieces of orange packing material and discard them.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.
Note
This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and are not required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to protect your machine during shipment.
A
83
g
Hold the green handle of the waste toner box and remove the waste toner box from the machine.
h
Unpack the new waste toner box and put the new waste toner box in the machine using the green handle. Make sure the waste toner box is level and fits firmly into place.
84
CAUTION
Handle the waste toner box carefully in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.
Note
Discard the used waste toner box according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.
i
Put the belt unit back into the machine.
Make sure the belt unit is level and fits firmly into place.
Routine maintenance j
Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.
1
k
Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
1
2
A
85
l
Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.
1
m
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
n
Close the front cover of the machine.
86
Cleaning and Checking the machine
A
Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure that you clean the inside of the machine. If printed pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.
WARNING
DO NOT use any flammable substances, spray or organic solvent/liquids containing alcohol/ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
Routine maintenance
Cleaning the outside of the machine
A
a
Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
b
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
Be careful not to inhale toner.
IMPORTANT
Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine will damage the surface of the machine.
c
Wipe the outside of the machine with a dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.
A
d
Remove any paper that is in the paper tray.
87
e
Wipe the inside and the outside of the paper tray with a dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.
f
Re-load the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
g
Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.
Cleaning the scanner glass
a
Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
b
Unfold the ADF document support (1) and then open the ADF cover (2).
Clean the white bar (3) and the scanner glass strip (4) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
Close the ADF cover (2) and fold the
ADF document support (1).
2 3
4
1
A
c
Lift the document cover (1).
Clean the white plastic surface (2) and scanner glass (3) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
1
2
3
88
d
In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the scanner glass strip (2) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
2
1
Routine maintenance
Cleaning the laser scanner windows
A
a
Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
b
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
Note
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass and glass strip with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water, run your finger tip over the glass to see if you can feel anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris, clean the glass again concentrating on that area. You may need to repeat the cleaning process three or four times. To test, make a copy after each cleaning.
e
Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.
A
89
c
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
d
Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
1
90
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
Routine maintenance e
Wipe the four scanner windows (1) with a dry, lint-free cloth.
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
1
1
f
Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.
A
91
g
Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
i
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
1
2
h
Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.
j
Close the front cover of the machine.
k
Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.
1
92
Cleaning the corona wires
If you have print quality problems, clean the four corona wires as follows: a
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
A
Routine maintenance b
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
93
A
c
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it toward the machine to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
d
Push to release the latches of the corona wire cover (1), and then open the cover.
1
94
e
Clean the corona wires inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tabs from left to right and right to left several times.
Routine maintenance f
Close the corona wire cover.
1
Note
Be sure to return the tab to the home position (a) (1). If you do not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
g
Repeat steps d to f to clean each of
three remaining corona wires.
A
95
h
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
i
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
C
M
Y
K
C - Cyan
Y - Yellow
M - Magenta
K - Black
96
j
Close the front cover of the machine.
Cleaning the drum unit
If your printout has coloured dots at 94 mm intervals, follow the steps below to solve the problem.
a
Make sure that the machine is in the
Ready mode.
b
Press MENU.
c
Press a or b to display
Print Reports
.
Press Print Reports.
d
Press a or b to display
Drum Dot Print
.
Press Drum Dot Print.
e
The machine will display Press Start.
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
f
The machine will print the Drum Dot test print. Then press Stop/Exit.
g
Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
A
Routine maintenance h
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
A
97
i
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
j
Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
1
98
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
Routine maintenance k
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
A
99
l
Turn the drum unit over by holding the green handles. Make sure that the drum unit gears (1) are on the left hand side.
n
On the problem colour drum, use the numbered markers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a cyan dot in column 2 on the check sheet would mean that there is a mark on the cyan drum in the "2" region.
1
m
Note the following information from the drum dot check sheet:
Dot colour
For example, a mark on the cyan drum would produce a cyan dot on the check sheet.
Dot location
Note which of the printed columns the dot appears in.
100
o
Turn the drum unit gear toward you by hand while looking at the surface of the suspected area.
Routine maintenance r
Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.
p
When you have found the mark on the drum that matches the drum dot check sheet, wipe the surface of the drum gently with a cotton swab until the dust or paper powder on the surface comes off.
Y
K
C
M
IMPORTANT
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
q
Turn the drum unit over by holding the green handles.
C - Cyan
Y - Yellow
M - Magenta
K - Black
101
A
s
Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.
u
Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.
1
1
v
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
t
Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
1
2
w
Close the front cover of the machine.
102
x
Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.
Routine maintenance
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers
If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows: a
Turn off the machine. Unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
b
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
A
103
A
c
Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad (1) of the paper tray with it to remove dust.
1
d
Wipe the two pick-up rollers (1) inside the machine to remove dust.
1
Calibration
The output density for each colour may vary depending on the environment the machine is in such as temperature and humidity.
Calibration helps you to improve the colour density.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.
c
Press a or b to display Calibration.
Press Calibration.
d
Press Calibrate.
e
The machine will display Calibrate?.
Press Yes to confirm.
f
The machine will display Completed.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
You can reset the calibration parameters back to those set at the factory.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.
c
Press a or b to display Calibration.
Press Calibration.
d
Press Reset.
e
The machine will display Reset?.
Press Yes to confirm.
f
The machine will display Completed.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
A
e
Put the paper tray back in the machine.
f
Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket. Turn on the machine.
104
Note
• If an error message is displayed, press
Mono Start or Colour Start and try again.
(For more information, see Error and
maintenance messages on page 107.)
• If you print using the Windows
®
printer driver, the driver will get the calibration data automatically if both Use Calibration
Data and Get Device Data
Automatically are on. The default settings are on. (See Advanced tab in the
Software User's Guide.)
• If you print using the Macintosh printer driver, you need to perform the calibration using the Status Monitor. After turning the Status Monitor on, choose Color
Calibration from the Control menu. (See
Status Monitor in the Software User's
Guide. When the Status Monitor is open, choose Control / Color Calibration from the menu bar.)
Routine maintenance
Auto Registration
Registration
If solid areas of colour or images have cyan, magenta or yellow fringes, you can use the auto-registration feature to correct the problem.
A
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.
c
Press a or b to display Auto Regist..
Press Auto Regist..
d
The machine will display
Registration?
.
Press Yes.
e
The machine will display Completed.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
A
A
105
Manual Registration
If colour still appears incorrectly after autoregistration, you will need to perform manual registration.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.
c
Press a or b to display
Manual Regist.
.
Press Manual Regist..
d
Press Print Chart.
e
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
f
When the machine has finished printing the registration chart, press
Set Regist.
to correct the colour manually.
g
Starting at 1 Magenta Left on the chart, check which coloured bar has the most uniform print density. Press
1 Magenta Left
and choose the number on the Touchscreen, using d or c to display more numbers if necessary.
Repeat for 2 Cyan Left,
3 Yellow Left
, 4, 5, 6 to 9.
h
Press OK if you finished entering the numbers.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
A
Frequency
(Colour Correction)
You can set how often the colour correction
(Colour Calibration and Auto Registration) occurs. The default setting is Normal. The colour correction process consumes some amount of the toner.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Printer.
Press Printer.
c
Press a or b to display Frequency.
Press Frequency.
d
Press Normal, Low or Off.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
A
106
B
Troubleshooting
B
Error and maintenance messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown below.
You can clear most errors and perform routine maintenance messages by yourself. If you need more help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips:
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
B
Error Message
Access Denied
Access Error
Calibration failed.
Cartridge Error
Put the Black (K)
Toner Cartridge back in.
1
The toner cartridge colour with the problem is shown in the message.
Comm.Error
Cause
The function you want to use is restricted by Secure Function
Lock.
The device is removed from the
USB direct interface while the data is processing.
Calibration failed.
Action
Contact your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.
Press Stop/Exit. Reinsert the device and try to print with Direct Print.
The toner cartridge is not installed correctly.
Turn off the machine. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the
Put in a new waste toner box. (See
Replacing the waste toner box on page 80.)
If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.
Pull out the drum unit and remove the toner cartridge for the colour that is indicated on the
LCD, then re-install the toner cartridge in the drum unit. Put the drum unit back into the machine.
Poor telephone line quality caused a communication error.
Try sending the fax again or try connecting the machine to another telephone line. If the problem continues, call the telephone company and ask them to check your telephone line.
B
107
Error Message
Condensation
Connection Fail
Cooling Down
Wait for a while
Cover is Open.
Cover is Open
Cover is Open
DIMM Error
Disconnected
Cause
One of the issues that can cause this error is that condensation may form inside the machine after a room temperature change.
You tried to poll a fax machine that is not in Polled Waiting mode.
The temperature of the drum unit or toner cartridge is too hot.
The machine will pause its current print job and go into cooling down mode. During the cooling down mode, you will hear the cooling fan running while the LCD shows Cooling
Down
, and Wait for a while
.
Action
Leave the machine powered on, and fully open the front cover. Wait 30 minutes, switch
OFF and close the cover, then switch ON. If this does not clear the error, call your Brother dealer.
Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.
Make sure that you can hear the fan in the machine spinning and that the exhaust outlet is not blocked by something.
If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles that surround the exhaust outlet, and then leave the machine turned on but do not use it for several minutes.
If the fan is not spinning, disconnect the machine from the power for several minutes, then reconnect it.
Close the front cover of the machine.
The front cover is not completely closed.
The ADF cover is not completely closed.
The ADF is open while loading a document.
The fuser cover is not completely closed or paper was jammed in the back of the machine when you turned on the power.
The DIMM is not installed correctly.
The DIMM is broken.
The DIMM does not meet the required specifications.
The other person or other person’s fax machine stopped the call.
Close the ADF cover of the machine.
Close the ADF cover of the machine, then press Stop/Exit.
Close the fuser cover of the machine.
Make sure paper is not jammed inside the back of the machine, and then close the fuser cover and press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Turn off the machine and remove the
DIMM.
Confirm the DIMM meets the required specifications. (See Memory board in
Appendix B of the Advanced User's
Guide.)
Re-install the DIMM correctly. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again.
If this error message appears again, replace the DIMM with a new one. (See
Installing extra memory in Appendix B of the Advanced User's Guide.)
Try to send or receive again.
108
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Document Jam
Drum Error
Drum Stop
Duplex Disabled
Low Temperature
Cause
The document was not inserted or fed correctly, or the document scanned from the ADF was too long.
The corona wire on the drum unit needs to be cleaned.
It is time to replace the drum unit.
The back of the machine is not closed completely.
Action
See Document jams on page 115 or Using
the automatic document feeder (ADF) on page 26.
Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. (See
Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)
Replace the drum unit. (See Replacing the
Close the back cover of the machine.
Close the Back
Cover of the machine.
Duplex Disabled
Reload paper, then press Start.
Fuser Error
Jam Duplex
Jam Inside
Jam MP
Jam Rear
Jam Tray 1
Jam Tray 2
Limit Exceeded
Although the size of paper in the paper tray matches the paper size that was selected from the control panel or printer driver, the machine has stopped printing when it encountered an additional, different size of paper in the tray.
The paper tray was pulled out before the machine completed printing on both sides of the paper.
The temperature of the fuser unit does not rise to a specified temperature within the specified time.
The fuser unit is too hot.
The paper is jammed underneath Paper Tray 1 or in the fuser unit.
The paper is jammed inside the machine.
The paper is jammed in the MP tray of the machine.
The paper is jammed in the back of the machine.
The paper is jammed in the paper tray of the machine.
Make sure the paper tray contains only the size of paper you select in either the control panel or printer driver, then press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Re-install the paper tray and press
Mono Start or Colour Start.
Turn the power switch off, wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the machine for 15 minutes with the power on.
(See Paper is jammed underneath paper tray
(See Paper is jammed inside the machine on page 121.)
(See Paper is jammed in the MP tray on page 117.)
(See Paper is jammed at the back of the
(See Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2 on page 118.)
The number of pages you are allowed to print has been exceeded. The print job will be cancelled.
The room temperature is too low for the machine to operate.
Contact your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.
Increase the room temperature to allow the machine to operate.
B
109
Error Message
No Belt Unit
No Paper
Cause
The belt unit is not installed correctly.
The machine is out of paper or paper is not correctly loaded in the paper tray.
Action
Re-install the belt unit. (See Replacing the
Do one of the following:
Refill the paper in the paper tray.
Remove the paper and load it again.
If the problem is not resolved, the paper pick-up roller may need to be cleaned.
Clean the paper pick-up roller. (See
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers on page 103.)
Contact your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.
No Permission
You have attempted to print in colour using a Secure Function
Lock ID that is restricted to mono printing only. The print job will be cancelled.
No Response/Busy
The number you dialled does not answer or is busy.
No Toner
The toner cartridge for the colour indicated on the LCD is not installed correctly.
No Tray
No Waste Toner
The paper tray indicated on the
LCD is not installed properly.
The waste toner box is not installed properly.
Verify the number and try again.
Pull out the drum unit. Take out the toner cartridge for the colour indicated on the LCD, and then put it back into the drum unit.
Re-install the paper tray that is indicated on the LCD.
Re-install the waste toner box. (See
Replacing the waste toner box on page 80.)
110
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Out of Memory
Print Unable XX
Registration failed
Cause Action
The machine’s memory is full.
Fax sending or copy operation in progress
Do one of the following:
Press Mono Start or Colour Start to send or copy the scanned pages.
The machine has a mechanical problem.
Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other operations in progress finish, and then try again.
Clear the faxes from the memory.
Print the faxes that are stored in the memory to restore the memory to 100%.
Then turn off Fax Storage to avoid storing more faxes in the memory. (See Printing a
fax from the memory in Chapter 4 of the
Advanced User's Guide and Fax Storage in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's
Guide.)
Add optional memory. (See Memory
board in Appendix B of the Advanced
User's Guide.)
Print operation in process
Do one of the following:
Reduce the print quality. (See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)
Clear the faxes from the memory. (See the above explanation.)
Do one of the following:
Registration failed.
Turn off the machine, wait for a few minutes, and then turn it on again. (See
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.
Do one of the following:
Turn off the machine’s power switch. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
Try Manual Registration, MENU, Printer,
Manual Regist.
Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the
If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.
B
111
Error Message
Rename the File
Replace Parts
Belt Unit
Replace Parts
Drum Unit
Replace Parts
Fuser Unit
Replace Parts
PF Kit 1
PF Kit 2
PF Kit MP
Replace Parts
WT Box End Soon
Replace Toner X
Cause
There is already a file on the
USB Flash memory drive with the same name as the file you are trying to save.
Action
Change the name of the file on the USB Flash memory drive or the file you are trying to save.
It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit. (See Replacing the belt
It is time to replace the drum unit.
Replace the drum unit.
(See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
The drum unit counter was not reset when a new drum was installed.
Reset the drum unit counter.
It is time to replace the fuser unit.
It is time to replace the paper feeding kit.
(See Resetting the drum counter on page 74.)
Call your Brother dealer or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to replace the fuser unit.
Call your Brother dealer or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to replace the
PF Kit.
Replace WT Box
Scan Unable XX
Short paper
Size Error DX
Size mismatch
The waste toner box is near the end of its life.
The toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
It is time to replace the waste toner box.
The machine has a mechanical problem.
Document is too long for duplex scanning.
The length of the paper in the tray is too short for the machine to deliver it to the Face-down output tray.
The paper size defined in the printer driver is not usable for the automatic duplex printing.
The paper in the tray is not the correct size.
Buy a new waste toner box before you get a
Replace WT Box
message.
Replace the toner cartridge for the colour
indicated on the LCD. (See Replacing a
Replace the waste toner box. (See Replacing
the waste toner box on page 80.)
Turn off the machine and then turn it on
again. (See Transferring your faxes or Fax
If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.
Press Stop/Exit. Use the suitable size of
paper for duplex scanning. (See Document
Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed paper out on the face-up output tray. Remove the printed pages and then press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Press Mono Start or Colour Start. Choose a paper size which is supported by the duplex
tray. (See Print media on page 187.)
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set the “Paper Size” (MENU, General
Setup
, Tray Setting).
(See Paper Size and Type on page 18.)
112
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Small paper
Toner Error
Toner Low
Too Many Files
Unusable Device
Cause
The paper size specified in the printer driver is too small for the machine to deliver it to the Face-
down output tray.
One or more toner cartridges are not installed correctly.
The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.
There are too many files stored on the USB Flash memory drive.
An incompatible or defective device has been connected to the USB direct interface.
Action
Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed paper out on the face-up output tray and then press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Pull out the drum unit. Take out all the toner cartridges, and then put them back into the drum unit.
Buy a new toner cartridge for the colour that is indicated on the LCD before you get a
Replace Toner
message.
Reduce the number of files stored on the USB
Flash memory drive.
Remove the USB Flash memory drive from the USB direct interface.
113
B
Transferring your faxes or Fax
Journal report
B
If the LCD shows:
Print Unable XX
Scan Unable XX
We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your PC. (See
Transferring faxes to another fax machine on page 114 or Transferring faxes to your PC on page 114.)
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you need to
transfer. (See Transferring the Fax Journal
report to another fax machine on page 114.)
Note
If there is an error message on the machine’s LCD after the faxes have been transferred, disconnect the machine from the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.
Transferring faxes to another fax machine
If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Enter
personal information (Station ID) in the Quick
Setup Guide.)
B
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Service.
Press Service.
c
Press Data Transfer.
d
Press Fax Transfer.
e
Do one of the following:
If the LCD shows No Data, there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press Stop/Exit.
Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.
f
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
114
Transferring faxes to your PC
You can transfer the faxes from your machine’s memory to your PC.
a
Make sure that you have installed
MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then turn on PC-Fax Receiving on the PC.
(For details about PC-Fax Receive, see
PC-FAX receiving in the Software
User's Guide.) b
Make sure that you have set
PC Fax Receive
on the machine.
(See PC-Fax Receive in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide.)
If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the faxes to your PC.
B
c
Do one of the following:
To transfer all faxes to your PC, press Yes. You will be asked if you want a backup print.
To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press No.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
Transferring the Fax Journal report to another fax machine
B
If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Enter
personal information (station ID) in the Quick
Setup Guide.) a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Service.
Press Service.
c
Press Data Transfer.
d
Press Report Trans..
e
Enter the fax number to which the Fax
Journal report will be forwarded.
f
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Document jams
Document is jammed in the top of the ADF unit
B
a
Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
b
Open the ADF cover.
c
Pull the jammed document out to the left.
B
Troubleshooting
Document is jammed under the document cover
B
a
Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
b
Lift the document cover.
c
Pull the jammed document out to the right.
d
Close the ADF cover.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
d
Close the document cover.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
B
115
Removing small documents jammed in the ADF
B
a
Lift the document cover.
b
Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.
Document is jammed at the output tray
B
a
Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
b
Pull the jammed document out to the right.
c
Press Stop/Exit.
c
Close the document cover.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
116
Paper jams
Paper is jammed in the
MP tray
If the LCD shows Jam MP, follow these steps: a
Remove the paper from the MP tray.
b
Remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.
B
B
Troubleshooting d
When loading paper in the MP tray, make sure that the paper stays under the maximum paper mark (1) on both sides of the tray.
1
c
Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.
e
Press Mono Start or Colour Start to resume printing.
B
117
Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2
If the LCD shows Jam Tray 1 or
Jam Tray 2
, follow these steps: a
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
For Jam Tray 1:
B
WARNING
DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.
For Jam Tray 2: b
Use both hands to slowly pull out the jammed paper.
118
IMPORTANT
If the paper cannot easily be removed in this direction, stop and follow the
instructions for Paper is jammed inside the
Note
Pulling out the jammed paper downwards allows you to remove the paper easier.
c
Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b) (1) of the paper tray. While pressing the green paper-guide release lever, slide the paper guides to fit the paper size. Make sure that the guides are firmly in the
slots. (See Loading paper in the
standard paper tray on page 11.)
1
Troubleshooting
Paper is jammed at the back of the machine
B
If the LCD shows Jam Rear, a paper jam occurred behind the back cover. Follow these steps: a
Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes to cool down.
b
Open the back cover.
d
Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
B
119
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the machine, some internal parts of the machine will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the machine.
c
Pull the green tabs (2) at the left and right hand sides toward you and fold down the fuser cover (1).
2
3
2
1
3
Note
If the envelope levers (3) inside the back cover are pulled down to the envelope position, lift these levers to the original position before pulling the green tabs (2) down.
d
Using both hands, gently pull the jammed paper out of the fuser unit.
120
e
Close the fuser cover (1).
2
1
2
Note
If you are printing on envelopes, pull down the envelope levers (2) to the envelope position again before closing the back cover.
f
Fully close the back cover.
Troubleshooting
Paper is jammed inside the machine
B
If the LCD shows Jam Inside, follow these steps: a
Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket. b
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
B
121
c
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
d
Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
1
122
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum unit and the toner cartridges on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
Troubleshooting e
Pull out the jammed paper slowly.
f
Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
1
B
123
g
Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
i
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
1
2
h
Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.
1
j
Close the front cover of the machine.
Note
If you turn off the machine while the LCD shows Jam Inside, the machine will print incomplete data from your computer.
Before you turn on the machine, delete the print spool job on your computer.
k
Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, and reconnect all cables and the telephone line cord.
Turn on the machine.
124
Paper is jammed underneath paper tray 1
B
If the LCD shows Jam Duplex, follow these steps: a
Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes to cool down.
b
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.
c
If paper is not caught inside the machine, turn the paper tray over and check underneath the paper tray.
Note
DO NOT put the paper tray back in at this point.
B
125
d
If the paper is not caught in the paper tray, open the back cover.
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the machine, some internal parts of the machine will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the machine.
126
e
Push down and pull the green tabs at the left and right hand sides toward you and fold down the fuser cover (1).
Troubleshooting g
Close the fuser cover (1).
1
1 f
Using both hands, gently pull out the jammed paper.
h
Fully close the back cover.
i
Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
B
127
If you are having difficulty with your machine
If you think there is a problem with your machine, check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.
Most problems can be easily resolved by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother
Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
If you think there is a problem with the way your faxes look, make a copy first. If the copy looks good, the problem may not be your machine. Check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.
B
Printing or printing received faxes
Difficulties
Condensed print
Horizontal streaks
Top and bottom sentences are cut off
Suggestions
Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. If your copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.
Missing lines
Poor print quality
See Improving the print quality on page 138.
Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wires for printing may be dirty. Clean the corona wires on the drum
unit. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
If the problem continues, call your dealer for service.
Received faxes appear as split or blank pages.
If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.
(See Paper Size and Type on page 18.)
Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax in Chapter 4 of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
Telephone line or connections
Difficulties
Dialling does not work.
The machine does not answer when called.
Suggestions
Check for a dial tone.
Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)
Check all line cord connections.
Check that the machine is plugged in and switched on.
If an external phone is connected to the machine, send a manual fax by lifting the handset of the external telephone and dialling the number. Wait to hear the fax receiving tones before pressing Mono Start or Colour Start.
Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. (See
Receive Mode settings on page 34.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your
machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord connection. If you do not hear ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone company to check the line.
128
Receiving Faxes
Difficulties
Cannot receive a fax.
Troubleshooting
Suggestions
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to
DSL or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as
the Brother machine. (See Receive Mode settings on page 34.)
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In
Fax/Tel
mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and produce a fast double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming faxes, you should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:
If the answer mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to
1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 34.)
If the answer mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your answering machine to 2.
If the answer mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the ring delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.
Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.
If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.
B
129
Receiving Faxes (continued)
Difficulties
Cannot receive a fax.
(continued)
Suggestions
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up
correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD on page 37.)
1
Connect the external TAD as shown in the illustration on page 37.
2 Set your answering machine to answer in one or two rings.
3 Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
End your outgoing message with your Remote Activation Code for people sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press l51 and Start to send a fax.”
4 Set your answering machine to answer calls.
5
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Receive
Make sure your Brother machine's Fax Detect feature is turned On. Fax Detect is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered the call on an
external or extension telephone. (See Fax Detect on page 35.)
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 137.)
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.
Sending faxes
Difficulties
Poor sending quality.
Transmission Verification Report says RESULT:ERROR.
Suggestions
Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.
(See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 88.)
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.
If you are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:ERROR on the
Transmission Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory, you can turn off fax storage (see Changing Remote Fax Options in
Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide), print fax messages in memory (see
Printing a fax from the memory in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide) or cancel a delayed fax or polling job (see Checking and cancelling waiting jobs in
Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 137.)
Sent faxes are blank.
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents on page 26.)
Vertical black lines when sending.
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid
on the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 88.)
Cannot send a fax.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.
130
Troubleshooting
Handling incoming calls
Difficulties
The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a
CNG Tone.
Suggestions
If Fax Detect is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Fax Detect to Off. (See Fax
Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Remote
Activation code (default setting is l51). When your machine answers, hang up.
Custom features on a single line.
If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Caller ID, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving faxes.
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.
Copy difficulties
Difficulties
Cannot make a copy.
Vertical black line appears in copies.
Copies are blank.
Suggestions
Make sure that COPY
is illuminated. (See How to copy on page 51.)
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.
Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the
glass strip, or one or more corona wires are dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner glass
on page 88 and Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Using the automatic
document feeder (ADF) on page 26 or Using the scanner glass on page 27.)
B
131
Printing difficulties
Difficulties
No printout.
The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage.
The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly, then some pages have text missing.
The headers or footers appear when the document displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is printed.
The machine does not print on both sides of the paper even though the printer driver setting is Duplex.
Suggestions
Check that the machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned on.
Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly. (See
Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Check the interface cable connection on both the machine and your computer.
(See the Quick Setup Guide.)
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.
Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and
maintenance messages on page 107.)
Check the machine is online:
(Windows
®
7 and Windows Server
®
2008 R2) Click the Start button and
Devices and Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows Vista
®
) Click the Start button, Control Panel, Hardware and
Sound, and then Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows
®
XP and Windows Server
®
2003/2008) Click the Start button and choose Printers and Faxes. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows
®
2000) Click the Start button and choose Settings and then
Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use
Printer Offline is unchecked.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a colour document, the print job cannot be completed. You can choose to start the print job again in Mono mode, as long as black toner is available. See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.
Press Job Cancel to cancel print jobs.
Check the settings in your application to make sure it is set up to work with your machine.
Check the settings in your application to make sure that it is set up to work with your machine.
Your computer is not recognising the machine’s input buffer’s full signal. Make sure that you connected the interface cable correctly. (See the Quick Setup
Guide.)
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and
bottom margins in your document to allow for this. (See Unscannable and
unprintable areas on page 17.)
Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You need to choose A4 [60 to
105 g/m
2
].
132
Troubleshooting
Printing difficulties (continued)
Difficulties
The machine is not printing or has stopped printing.
The machine does not change to
Direct Print mode when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.
Suggestions
If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a colour document, the print job cannot be completed. You can choose to start the print job again in Mono mode, as long as black toner is available. See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.
Press Job Cancel.
As the machine cancels the print job and clears it from the memory it may produce an incomplete printout.
When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the machine does not wake up when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface. Press the LCD surface or any key to wake up the machine. Then press Direct Print on the
LCD to display the Direct Print menu.
Scanning difficulties
Difficulties
TWAIN errors appear while scanning.
OCR does not work.
Network scanning does not work.
Cannot scan.
Suggestions
Make sure that the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source. In
PaperPort™ 12SE, click File, Scan or Get Photo and choose the Brother TWAIN driver.
Try increasing the scanning resolution.
(Macintosh users)
Presto! PageManager must be downloaded and installed before use. See
Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh) on page 4 for further instructions.
See Network difficulties on page 135.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.
Software difficulties
Difficulties
Cannot install software or print.
Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’ printing.
The machine does not print from
Adobe
®
Illustrator
®
.
Suggestions
Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair and reinstall the software.
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the same.
Try to reduce the print quality. (See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)
B
133
Paper handling difficulties
Difficulties
The machine does not feed paper.
The LCD shows No Paper or a
Paper Jam message.
The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray.
How do I print on envelopes?
What paper can I use?
There is a paper jam.
Suggestions
If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray.
If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled, you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the stack over and put it back into the paper tray.
Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.
Make sure that manual feed mode is not chosen in the printer driver.
Clean the paper pick-up roller. See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers on page 103.
If the LCD shows the Paper Jam message and you still have a problem, see
Error and maintenance messages on page 107.
Make sure that MP tray is chosen in the printer driver.
Fan the paper well and put it back in the tray firmly.
You can load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be set up to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or
Document Setup menu of your application. (See your application’s manual for more information.)
You can use thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper, glossy paper, envelopes and labels that are made for laser machines. (For details,
see Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)
Clear the jammed paper. (See Error and maintenance messages on page 107.)
Print quality difficulties
Difficulties
Printed pages are curled.
Printed pages are smeared.
Printouts are too light.
Suggestions
Low quality thin or thick paper or not printing on the recommended side of the paper could cause this problem. Try turning over the stack of paper in the paper tray.
Make sure that you choose the Paper Type that suits the print media type you
are using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)
The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using,
or the print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable
paper and other print media on page 21 and Basic tab in the Software User's
Guide.)
If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, set
Toner Save mode to Off in the machine menu settings. (See Toner Save in
Chapter 1 of the Advanced User's Guide)
Remove the check in the Toner Save Mode check box in the Advanced tab of the printer driver. (See Advanced tab in the Software User's Guide.)
In the Basic tab of the printer driver, click the Settings button and check the
Enhance Black Printing check box.
134
Troubleshooting
Network difficulties
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot print over a wired Network. If you are having Network problems see the Network User's Guide for more information.
The network scanning feature does not work.
Make sure your machine is powered on and is on-line and in Ready mode. Print the Network Configuration Report to see your current Network settings. (See
Reports in Chapter 6 of the Advanced User's Guide.) Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify that the cable and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. You can check the current wired network status from the Network control panel menu.
(Windows
®
)
It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow Network scanning. To add port 54925 for Network scanning, enter the information below:
In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother NetScan.
In Port number: Enter 54925.
In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at http://solutions.brother.com/.
The network PC-Fax Receive feature does not work.
(Macintosh)
The network scanning feature may not work due to the firewall settings.
Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal
Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.
Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the model list in ControlCenter2.
(Windows
®
only)
It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX
Rx. To add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, enter the information below:
In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
In Port number: Enter 54926.
In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at http://solutions.brother.com/.
B
135
Network difficulties (continued)
Difficulties
Your computer cannot find your machine.
Cannot connect to wireless network.
Suggestions
(Windows
®
) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection. (For details, see the instructions above.)
(Macintosh)
The computer may be unable to detect the machine due to the firewall settings. Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.
Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the Model pop-up menu of ControlCenter2.
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report. Press MENU, Print Reports,
WLAN Report
. and then press Mono Start or Colour Start. For more details, see the Quick Setup Guide.
Other
Difficulties
The machine will not turn on.
Suggestions
Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
If the problem is not solved, turn off the machine. Plug the power cord into a different known working outlet and turn on the machine.
136
Setting Dial Tone detection
When you send a fax automatically, by default your machine will wait for a fixed amount of time before it starts to dial the number. By changing the Dial Tone setting to
Detection
you can make your machine dial as soon as it detects a dial tone. This setting can save a small amount of time when sending a fax to many different numbers. If you change the setting and start having problems with dialling you should change back to the default No Detection setting.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup
.
Press Initial Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Dial Tone.
Press Dial Tone.
d
Press Detection or No Detection.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
B
Troubleshooting
Telephone line interference /
VoIP
B
If you are having difficulty sending or receiving a fax due to possible interference on the telephone line, we recommend that you adjust the Equalization for compatibility to reduce the modem speed for fax operations.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous
.
Press Miscellaneous.
d
Press Compatibility.
e
Press Basic(for VoIP), Normal or
High
.
Basic(for VoIP)
reduces the modem speed to 9600 bps and turns the error correction mode (ECM) off.
For a standard telephone line: If you regularly experience interference on your standard telephone line try this setting.
If you are using VoIP: VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If you regularly experience fax transmission errors try this setting.
Normal
sets the modem speed at
14400 bps.
High
sets the modem speed at
33600 bps.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
When you change the Compatibility to
Basic(for VoIP)
, the ECM feature is only available for colour fax sending.
B
137
Improving the print quality
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first (MENU, Printer, Print Options,
Test Print
). If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not the machine. Check the interface cable connections or try printing a different document. If the printout or test page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the following steps first. And then, if you still have a print quality problem, check the chart below and follow the recommendations.
Note
Brother does not recommend the use of cartridges other than Brother Original cartridges or the refilling of used cartridges with toner from other sources.
a
To get the best print quality, we suggest using the recommended paper. Check that you use
paper that meets our specifications. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)
b
Check that the drum unit and toner cartridges are installed properly.
B
Examples of poor print quality
White lines, bands or ribbing across the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Recommendation
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Colours are light or unclear on the whole page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine or the printer driver.
Make sure that you choose the correct media type in the printer driver
or in the machine's Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable paper
and other print media on page 21 and Basic tab in the Software
User's Guide.)
Shake all four toner cartridges gently.
Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry lint-free soft cloth. (See
Cleaning the laser scanner windows on page 89.)
Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 104.)
138
Troubleshooting
Examples of poor print quality
White streaks or bands down the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Recommendation
Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the
Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry lint-free soft cloth. (See
Cleaning the laser scanner windows on page 89.)
Clean the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 97.)
Identify the missing colour and put in a new toner cartridge. (See
Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Coloured streaks or bands down the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Coloured lines across the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
White spots or hollow print
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Clean all four corona wires (one for each colour) inside the drum unit
by sliding the green tab. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)
Make sure the corona wire green tabs are at their home positions (a).
Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the
Replace the toner cartridge that matches the colour of the streak or
band. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
If coloured lines appear at 30 mm intervals, replace the toner
cartridge that matches the colour of the line. (See Replacing a Toner
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
If coloured lines appear at 94 mm intervals, put in a new drum unit.
(See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine's Paper Type menu match the type of paper you are using.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and Basic
tab in the Software User's Guide.)
Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity can cause white spots or hollow print. (See Choosing a location in the
Safety and Legal Booklet.)
Clean the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 97.)
B
139
Examples of poor print quality
Completely blank or some colours are missing
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Recommendation
Put in a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Coloured spots at 94 mm
94 mm
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
If the problem is not solved after printing, the drum may have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean
the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 97.)
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
94 mm
Coloured spots at 30 mm
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
30 mm
Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
30 mm
Toner scatter or toner stain
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as high humidity and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See
Choosing a location in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)
Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
If the problem continues, put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the
140
Troubleshooting
Examples of poor print quality
The colour of your printouts is not what you expected
All one colour
Recommendation
Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine or the printer driver.
Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 104.)
Adjust the colour by using the custom setting in the printer driver and by using the control panel of the machine. Colours the machine can print and colours you see on a monitor are different. The machine may not be able to reproduce the colours on your monitor.
If colours appear in the printed grey areas, make sure there is a check in the Improve Grey Colour check box of the printer driver. (See
Basic tab for Windows
®
printer driver, Advanced options for
Windows
®
BR-Script printer driver, Print Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide.)
If shaded areas look dull, remove the check from the Improve Grey
Colour check box.
If a printed black graphic is too light, choose Enhance Black Printing mode in the printer driver. (See Settings Dialog for Windows
®
printer driver, Advanced options for Windows
®
BR-Script printer driver, Print
Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh
BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide.)
Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Colour misregistration
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Make sure that the machine is on a solid level surface.
Perform the auto colour registration using the control panel (see Auto
Registration on page 105) or perform the manual colour registration
using the control panel (see Manual Registration on page 106).
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the belt unit on page 74.)
B
141
Examples of poor print quality
Uneven density appears periodically across the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Recommendation
Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 104.)
Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the
Identify the colour that is uneven and put in a new toner cartridge for
that colour. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
Thin lines do not print
Wrinkle
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Offset image
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine or the printer driver.
Change the print resolution.
If you use a Windows
®
printer driver, choose Improve Pattern
Printing or Improve Thin Line in Settings from the Basic tab. (See
Settings Dialog in the Software User's Guide.)
Change to the recommended type of paper. (See Recommended
paper and print media on page 21.)
Make sure that the back cover is closed properly.
Make sure that the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position. When you are using thick paper or envelopes, make sure the grey levers are in the down position to prevent wrinkling.
Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine’s Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)
Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)
Make sure that the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position.
Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as low humidity and low temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See
Choosing a location in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)
Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)
142
Examples of poor print quality
Poor fixing
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Curled or wavy
Troubleshooting
Recommendation
Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)
Make sure that the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position.
Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. (See Other
Print Options (For Windows
®
printer driver), Advanced options (For
Windows
®
BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the Software User's Guide.)
If this selection does not provide enough improvement, change the printer driver setting in Media Type to a thick setting.
Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver when you do not use our recommended paper. (See Other Print Options (For
Windows
®
printer driver), Advanced options (For Windows
®
BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the
Software User's Guide.)
If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray.
Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180
° in the paper tray.
Store the paper where it will not be exposed to avoid high temperatures and high humidity.
Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed paper out on the face-up output tray.
B
143
Examples of poor print quality
Envelope creases
Recommendation
Make sure that the two grey envelope levers are pulled down when you are printing envelopes.
If creases occur with the envelope levers in the envelope position, print with the back cover opened and feed one envelope at a time from the MP tray.
144
Machine Information
Checking the Serial Number
B
You can see the machine’s Serial Number on the LCD.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Machine Info.
.
Press Machine Info..
c
The machine will display the machine’s
Serial Number on the LCD.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
B
Troubleshooting
Reset functions
The following reset functions are available:
1 Network
You can reset the internal print server back to its default factory settings such as the password and IP address information.
2 Address & Fax
Address & Fax resets the following settings:
Address Book
(One Touch Dial/Speed Dial/Setup
Groups)
Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Polled TX, Delayed Fax)
Station ID
(name and number)
Coverpage Msg
(comments)
Remote Fax Options
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage,
Fax Forwarding, Paging, PC-Fax
Send, and PC-Fax Receive
(Windows
®
only))
Report settings
(Transmission Verification Report/
Tel Index List/Fax Journal)
Setting Lock password
3 All Settings
You can reset all the machine settings back to the settings that were default factory settings.
Brother strongly recommends you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine.
Note
Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network or All Settings.
B
B
145
How to reset the machine
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup
.
Press Initial Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Reset.
Press Reset.
d
Press Network, Address & Fax or
All settings
to choose the reset function you want to use.
e
Do one of the following;
To reset the settings, press Yes and
To exit without making changes,
f
You will be asked to reboot the machine.
Do one of the following;
To reboot the machine press Yes for
2 seconds. The machine will begin the reboot.
To exit without rebooting the
machine, press No. Go to step g.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can also reset the Network settings by pressing MENU, Network,
Network Reset
.
B
146
C
Menu and features
On-screen programming
Your machine is designed to be easy to operate with LCD on-screen programming using the menu buttons on the Touchscreen.
User-friendly programming helps you take full advantage of all the menu selections your machine has to offer.
Since your programming is done on the LCD, we have created step-by-step on-screen instructions to help you program your machine. All you need to do is follow the instructions as they guide you through the menu selections and programming options.
C
Menu table
You can program your machine by using the
Menu table that begins on page 148. These
pages list the menu selections and options.
C
MENU button and mode keys
Access the main menu.
MENU
Access each mode and its menu of temporary settings.
C
Exit the menu or stop the current operation.
C
147
C
Menu table
The menu table will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine's programs. The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
MENU
Level 1
General Setup
Level 2
Mode Timer
Tray Setting
Level 3
—
MP Tray
Level 4
—
—
Options
0
Sec
30
Secs
1 Min
2
Mins*
5
Mins
Off
Paper Size
A4
*
Letter
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio
Any
Paper Type
Thin
Plain
*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper
Glossy
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Sets the time to return to Fax mode and the time the machine will change from individual user to Public user mode when using Secure
Function Lock.
Page
See
1
.
Sets the size and type of paper in paper
MP tray.
C
148
Menu and features
Level 1
General Setup
(Continued)
Level 2
Tray Setting
(Continued)
Level 3
Tray#1
Level 4
—
Options
Paper Size
A4
*
Letter
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio
Paper Type
Thin
Plain
*
Thick
Descriptions
Sets the size and type of paper in paper tray #1.
Tray#2
(This menu only appears if you have the optional tray#2.)
—
Thicker
Recycled Paper
Paper Size
A4
*
Sets the size and type of paper in paper tray #2.
Letter
Legal
Executive
A5
B5
B6
Folio
Paper Type
Thin
Plain
*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page
C
149
Level 1
General Setup
(Continued)
Level 2
Tray Setting
(Continued)
Level 3 Level 4
Tray Use:Copy
—
Options
Tray#1 Only
Descriptions
Chooses the tray that will be used for Copy mode.
Page
Tray#2 Only
MP Only
MP>T1>T2
*
T1>T2>MP
(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)
Tray#1 Only
Tray Use:Fax
Tray Use:Print
—
—
Tray#2 Only
MP Only
MP>T1>T2
T1>T2>MP
*
(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)
Tray#1 Only
Tray#2 Only
MP Only
MP>T1>T2
*
T1>T2>MP
(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Chooses the tray that will be used for Fax mode.
Chooses the tray that will be used for Print mode.
150
Menu and features
Level 1
General Setup
(Continued)
Level 2
Volume
Ecology
Level 3
Ring
Beeper
Speaker
Toner Save
Level 4
—
—
—
—
LCD Settings
Security
Sleep Time
Backlight
Dim Timer
—
—
—
Range varies depending on models.
3 Mins
*
Light
*
Med
Dark
Off
*
10 Secs
20 Secs
Function Lock Set Password
30 Secs
—
Lock OffiOn
Setup ID
Low
Med
*
High
On
Off
*
Options
Off
Low
Med
*
High
Off
Low
Med
*
High
Off
Setting Lock Set Password
Lock OffiOn
—
Descriptions
Adjusts the ring volume.
Adjusts the beeper volume.
Adjusts the speaker volume.
Increases the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Conserves power.
You can adjust the brightness of the
LCD backlight.
You can set how long the LCD backlight stays on for after the last key press.
You can restrict selected machine operations for up to
25 restricted users and all other nonauthorized Public users.
Stops unauthorized users from changing the machine’s current settings.
Page
See
1
.
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
151
MENU
Level 1
Fax
Level 2
Setup Receive
(In Fax mode only)
Level 3
Ring Delay
F/T Ring Time
Fax Detect
Remote Codes
Auto Reduction
Forward/Store
(Backup Print)
Level 4
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options
(0 - 8)
2
*
(Example for the
UK)
20
Secs
30
Secs*
40
Secs
70
Secs
On
*
Descriptions
Sets the number of rings before the machine answers in
Fax Only or Fax/Tel mode.
Sets the length of the fast double-ring time in Fax/Tel mode.
Off
On
On
(l51, #51)
Off
*
*
Receives fax messages automatically when you answer a call and hear fax tones.
Allows you to answer all calls at an extension or external phone and use codes to turn the machine on or off. You can personalize these codes.
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
Off
Off
*
Fax Forward
Fax Storage
PC Fax Receive
Sets the machine to forward fax messages, to store incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve them while you are away from your machine), or to send faxes to your
PC.
If you chose Fax
Forward or PC-Fax
Receive, you can turn on the safety feature Backup Print.
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page
See
1
.
C
152
Menu and features
Level 1
Fax
(Continued)
Level 2
Setup Receive
(In Fax mode only)
(Continued)
Level 3 Level 4
Print Density
—
Options
-2
-1
0
*
Descriptions
Makes printouts darker or lighter.
+1
+2
Setup Send
Report Setting
Fax Rx Stamp
Duplex
Batch TX
Coverpage Setting
XMIT report
—
—
—
Print Sample
Coverpage Note
—
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
—
—
On
*
*
*
On+Image
Off
*
Prints the received time and date on the top of the received faxes.
Prints receive faxes on both sides of the paper.
Combines delayed faxes going to the same fax number at the same time of day into one transmission.
You can print a sample of the fax cover page.
Set up your own comments for the fax cover page.
Choose the initial setup for the
Transmission
Verification Report.
Print Document
Remote Access
Journal Period
—
—
—
—
—
Off+Image
Off
Every 50 Faxes
*
Every 6 Hours
Every 12 Hours
Every 24 Hours
Every 2 Days
Every 7 Days
—
---l
Sets the interval for automatic printing of the Fax Journal.
If you have chosen other than Off and
Every 50 Faxes
, you can set the time for the chosen option.
If you have chosen
Every 7 Days
, you can also set the day of the week.
Prints incoming faxes stored in the memory.
Set your own code for
Remote Retrieval.
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page
See
1
.
See
1
.
C
153
Level 1
Fax
(Continued)
Level 2 Level 3
Dial Restrict.
Dial Pad
Remaining Jobs
Miscellaneous
One Touch Dial
Speed Dial
LDAP Server
—
Compatibility
BT Call Sign
Level 4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options
Off
Enter # twice
On
Off
*
Enter # twice
On
Off
On
Off
*
*
Enter # twice
Enter # twice
On
—
High
On
*
(U.K. only)
Off
*
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
*
Normal
Basic(for VoIP)
Descriptions
You can set the machine to restrict dialling when using the dial pad.
You can set the machine to restrict the dialling of
One Touch numbers.
You can set the machine to restrict the dialling of Speed
Dial numbers.
You can set the machine to restrict the dialling of LDAP server numbers.
Check which scheduled jobs are in the memory and cancel chosen jobs.
Adjusts the equalization for transmission difficulties.
VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If you regularly experience fax transmission errors, choose
Basic(for VoIP)
.
Used with BT Call
Sign.
Page
See
1
.
See
1
.
154
Menu and features
MENU
Level 1
Printer
C
Level 2
Emulation
Print Options
Duplex
Output Color
Reset Printer
Level 3
—
Internal Font
Configuration
Test Print
—
—
—
Level 4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Calibration
Auto Regist.
Calibrate
Reset
—
—
—
—
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
1
See Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Options
Auto
*
HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3
HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3
—
—
Off
*
Long Edge
Short Edge
Auto
*
Color
B&W
Yes
No
Descriptions
Choose the emulation mode.
Prints a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
Prints a list of the machine’s printer settings.
Prints a test page.
Enables or disables duplex printing. You can also choose long edge or short edge duplex printing.
Chooses colour or black & white printed documents. If you choose Auto, the machine selects a suitable option for the document (color or
B&W).
Restores the printer settings to the original factory default settings.
Adjusts the colour density or returns the colour calibration to the factory settings.
Adjusts the print position of each colour automatically.
Page
See
1
.
C
155
Level 1
Printer
(Continued)
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Manual Regist.
Print Chart
—
Options
—
Set Regist.
1 Magenta Left
2 Cyan Left
—
3 Yellow Left
4 Magenta Center
5 Cyan Center
6 Yellow Center
7 Magenta Right
8 Cyan Right
Frequency
—
9 Yellow Right
—
Normal
*
Low
Off
1
See Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Print the chart to manually check the registration of the colours.
Sets the correction value on the chart you printed from
Print Chart
.
Page
Sets the interval time you want to carry out the auto registration and the calibration.
156
Menu and features
MENU
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Print Reports XMIT Verify View on LCD
—
Print Report
—
Help List
— —
Options
—
—
—
Tel Index List Numerical
Order
—
Alphabetical
Order
Fax Journal
—
—
—
User Settings
—
Network Config
—
Drum Dot Print
—
WLAN Report
—
Order Form
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
2
See Advanced User's Guide
See Quick Setup Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Displays and prints a
Transmission
Verification Report for your last transmission.
Prints the Help List so you can see at-aglance how to quickly program your machine.
Lists names and numbers stored in the One Touch and
Speed Dial memory, in numerical or alphabetical order.
Page
See
1
.
C
Lists information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes.
(TX means Transmit.
RX means Receive.)
Lists your settings.
Lists your Network settings.
Prints the drum dot check sheet.
Prints the result of wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.
You can print an accessories order form to fill out and send to you Brother dealer.
See
2
.
See
1
.
C
157
MENU
Level 1
Network
1
Level 2 Level 3
Wired LAN TCP/IP
Level 4 Level 5
Boot Method
—
(IP Boot
Tries
)
IP Address
—
Subnet Mask
—
Gateway
—
Node Name
—
WINS Config
—
WINS Server
—
Options
Auto
*
Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
Descriptions
Chooses the BOOT method that best suits your needs.
3
*
[00000-32767]
Specifies the number of setting trials when the
Boot Method allows automatic IP setting.
Enter the IP address.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the Subnet mask.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the Gateway address.
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX
Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
Auto
*
Chooses the WINS configuration mode.
Static
Primary
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary WINS server.
Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
C
1
See Network User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
158
Menu and features
Level 1
Network
1
(Continued)
Level 2
Wired LAN
(Continued)
Level 3
TCP/IP
(Continued)
Level 4 Level 5
DNS Server
—
APIPA
IPv6
Ethernet
—
Wired Status
—
—
—
—
—
MAC Address
—
Set to Default
—
Wired Enable
—
—
—
—
1
See Network User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Options
Primary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
On
*
Off
Descriptions
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary DNS server.
On
Off
*
Automatically allocates the IP address from the link-local address range.
Enable or Disable the IPv6 protocol. If you want to use the
IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.
brother.com/ for more information.
Chooses the
Ethernet link mode.
Auto
*
100B-FD
100B-HD
10B-FD
10B-HD
Active 100B-FD
Active 100B-HD
You can see the current wired status.
Active 10B-FD
Active 10B-HD
InActive
Wired OFF
—
Yes
No
On
*
Off
Shows the MAC address of the machine.
Restore the wired network setting to factory default.
Enable or Disable the Wired LAN manually.
C
159
Level 1
Network
1
(Continued)
Level 2
WLAN
Level 3
TCP/IP
Level 4 Level 5
Boot Method
—
(IP Boot
Tries
)
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Node Name
WINS Config
WINS Server
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options
Auto
*
Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
Descriptions
Chooses the BOOT method that best suits your needs.
3
*
[00000-32767]
Specifies the number of setting trials when the
Boot Method allows automatic IP setting.
Enter the IP address.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the Subnet mask.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX
Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
Auto
*
Chooses the WINS configuration mode.
Static
Enter the Gateway address.
Primary
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary WINS server.
Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
1
See Network User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
160
Menu and features
Level 1
Network
1
(Continued)
Level 2
WLAN
(Continued)
Level 3
TCP/IP
(Continued)
Level 4 Level 5
DNS Server
—
APIPA
IPv6
Setup Wizard
—
WPS/AOSS
—
WPS w/PIN Code
—
—
—
—
—
—
WLAN Status Status
—
Options
Primary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Secondary
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
On
*
Off
Descriptions
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary DNS server.
On
Off
—
—
—
*
Active(11b)
Active(11g)
Wired LAN Active
WLAN Off
Automatically allocates the IP address from the link-local address range.
Enable or Disable the IPv6 protocol. If you want to use the
IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.
brother.com/ for more information.
You can configure your internal print server.
You can easily configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
You can easily configure your wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
You can see the current wireless network status.
AOSS Active
Connection Fail
C
1
See Network User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
161
Level 1
Network
1
(Continued)
Level 2
WLAN
(Continued)
Level 3
WLAN Status
(Continued)
Level 4
Signal
Level 5
—
Options
Strong
Medium
Weak
Descriptions
You can see the current wireless network signal strength.
E-mail/IFAX
MAC Address
Set to Default
WLAN Enable
Mail Address
Setup Server
SSID
Comm. Mode
—
—
—
—
SMTP
—
—
—
—
—
—
None
—
Ad-hoc
Infrastructure
—
Yes
No
On
Off
—
*
You can see the current SSID.
You can see the current
Communication
Mode.
Shows the MAC address of the machine.
Restore the wireless network settings to factory default.
Enable or disable the wireless LAN manually.
Enter the mail address. (Up to 60 characters)
Enter the SMTP server address.
SMTP Server
Name
(Up to 64 characters)
IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
SMTP Port 25
*
[00001-65535]
Auth. for SMTP None
*
Enter the SMTP port number.
SMTP-AUTH
Selects the Security method for E-mail notification.
POP bef. SMTP
SMTP SSL/TLS None
*
Verify SMTPCert.
SSL
TLS
On
Off
*
You can send or receive an E-mail via an E-mail server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify the SMTP
Server Certificate automatically.
1
See Network User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
162
Menu and features
Level 1
Network
1
(Continued)
Level 2
E-mail/IFAX
(Continued)
Level 3
Setup Server
(Continued)
Setup Mail RX
Level 4
POP3
Auto Polling
Level 5 Options
POP3 Server
Name
(Up to 64 characters)
IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
POP3 Port 110
*
[00001-65535]
Mailbox Name
—
Descriptions
Enter the POP3 server address.
Mailbox Pwd
POP3 SSL/TLS
—
None
SSL
TLS
Verify POP3Cert.
On
Off
*
APOP
—
Poll Frequency
(When Auto
Polling
is set to On.)
1
See Network User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
On
Off
*
On
*
Off
10
*
*
[01-60] Min
Enter the POP3 port number.
Enter the mail box name. (Up to 60 characters)
Enter the password to login to the POP3 server. (Up to 32 characters)
You can send or receive an E-mail via an E-mail server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify the POP3
Server Certificate automatically.
Enables or disables
APOP.
Automatically checks the POP3 server for new messages.
Sets the interval for checking for new messages on the
POP3 server.
C
163
Level 1
Network
1
(Continued)
Level 2
E-mail/IFAX
(Continued)
Level 3
Setup Mail RX
(Continued)
Level 4
Header
Fax to Server
Setup Mail TX
Del Error Mail
—
Notification
Sender Subject
Level 5
—
—
—
Size Limit
—
Notification
—
Setup Relay Rly Broadcast
—
—
Relay Domain
—
Relay Report
—
— —
Network Reset
— — —
1
See Network User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
On
Off
*
On
Off
*
On
Off
*
Options
All
Subject+From+To
None
*
On
*
Descriptions
Selects the contents of the mail header to be printed.
Deletes error mails automatically.
Off
On
MDN
Off
*
—
Receives notification messages.
Displays the subject that is attached to the Internet Fax data.
Limits the size of
E-mail documents.
—
Sends notification messages.
Relays a document to another fax machine.
Registers the
Domain name.
Prints the Relay
Broadcast Report.
On
Off
*
On
(Prefix/Suffix)
Off
*
Yes
No
You can store a prefix/suffix address in the machine and can send a document from a fax server system.
Restore all network settings to factory default.
164
Menu and features
MENU
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Machine Info.
Serial No.
—
Level 4
—
Options
—
Page Counter
— —
Parts Life Drum
Belt Unit
Fuser
Laser
PF Kit MP
PF Kit 1
PF Kit 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Total
Fax/List
Copy
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Descriptions
You can check the serial number of your machine.
You can check the number of total pages the machine has printed during its life.
Page
See
1
.
You can check the percentage of a machine part’s life that remains available.
(PF Kit 2 appears only if you installed the optional
LT-300CL paper tray.)
C
165
C
MENU
Level 1
Initial Setup
Level 2
Receive Mode
Level 3
—
Level 4
—
Options
Fax Only
*
Fax/Tel
External TAD
Descriptions
Chooses the receive mode that best suits your needs.
Date&Time
Station ID
Tone/Pulse
Dial Tone
Phone Line Set
Reset
Local Language
(in Eastern
Europe)
Date&Time
Auto Daylight
Time Zone
—
—
—
—
Network
Address & Fax
All Settings
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Manual
—
On
*
Off
UTCXXX:XX
Fax:
Tel:
Name:
Tone
*
Pulse
Detection
No Detection
*
Normal
ISDN
*
Puts the date and time on the LCD and in headings of faxes you send.
Changes for Daylight
Savings Time automatically.
Sets the time zone for your country.
Sets up your name and fax number to appear on each page you fax.
Chooses the dialling mode.
You can shorten the dial tone detect pause.
Select the phone line type.
PBX
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
(Choose your language.)
1
2
See Advanced User's Guide.
See Quick Setup Guide.
3
See Network User's Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Restores all network settings to factory default.
Restores all stored phone numbers and fax settings.
Restores all the machine settings to the factory default.
Allows you to change the LCD language for your country.
Page
See
2
.
See
1
.
See
3
.
See
2
.
C
166
Menu and features
FAX ( )
Level 1 Level 2
Address Book More
Duplex Fax
Fax Resolution
Contrast
Glass ScanSize
Broadcasting
—
—
—
—
Manual
Level 3
Set One Touch Dial
Set Speed Dial
Setup Groups
Change
Delete
—
—
—
—
—
Address Book
—
Level 4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options
—
—
—
—
—
Off
*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge
DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
Standard
*
Fine
S.Fine
Photo
Auto
*
Light
Dark
A4
*
Letter
Legal/Folio
—
—
Descriptions
Stores up to 40 One
Touch Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing one key
(and Mono Start or
Colour Start).
Stores up to 300
Speed Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing only a few keys (and
Mono Start or
Colour Start).
Sets up to 20 Group numbers for
Broadcasting.
You can change One
Touch and Speed
Dial numbers.
You can delete One
Touch and Speed
Dial numbers.
Sets the duplex scanning format.
Page
See
1
.
C
Sets the resolution for outgoing faxes.
Changes the lightness or darkness of faxes you send.
To fax a Letter, Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
You can send the same fax message to more than one fax number.
See
1
.
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
167
Level 1
Delayed Fax
—
Real Time TX
Polled TX
Coverpage Setup
Polling RX
Overseas Mode
Set New Default
Level 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
Level 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Level 4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options
On
Off
*
Descriptions
Sets the time of day in 24 hour format that delayed faxes will be sent.
Sends a fax without using the memory.
On
Off
*
Standard
Secure
Off
On
Off
*
*
Standard
Secure
Sets up your machine with a document to be retrieved by another fax machine.
Automatically sends a cover page you have programmed.
Sets up your machine to poll another fax machine.
Timer
Off
*
On
Off
*
If you are having difficulty sending faxes overseas, set this to On.
Fax Resolution
You can save your fax settings as the
Contrast default settings.
Glass ScanSize
Page
See
1
.
Factory Reset
— — —
Real Time TX
Coverpage Setup
— You can restore all fax settings to the factory settings.
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
168
Menu and features
COPY (
Level 1
Quality
)
Level 2
—
Level 3
—
Options 1
Auto
*
Text
Photo
Graph
100%
*
Enlarge
Options 2
—
Descriptions
You can choose the
Copy resolution for your type of document.
Enlarge/Reduce
Duplex Copy
—
—
—
—
Reduce
141% A5iA4
200%
50%
70% A4 i A5
78% LGLiLTR
83% LGLiA4
85% LTR i EXE
91% Full Page
94% A4 i LTR
97% LTRiA4
Custom (25-400%)
—
Off
*
2sidei2side
—
104% EXEiLTR
—
1sidei2side
LongEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
LongEdgeFlip
1sidei2side
ShortEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
ShortEdgeFlip
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
—
You can choose the enlargement ratio for the next copy.
You can choose the reduction ratio for the next copy.
You can choose the enlargement or reduction ratio for the next copy.
Enables or disables duplex printing. You can also choose long edge or short edge duplex printing.
Page
See
1
.
C
C
169
Level 1
Tray Use
Brightness
Contrast
Stack / Sort
Page Layout
Color Adjust
Level 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
Level 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options 1
Tray#1 Only
Tray#2 Only
MP Only
MP>T1>T2
*
T1>T2>MP
(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)
Options 2
—
—
-2
+1
+2
-1
0
—
0
+1
-2
-1
Stack
*
+2
Sort
Off(1in1)
*
2in1(P)
2in1(L)
2in1(ID)
4in1(P)
4in1(L)
Red
—
—
0
+1
-2
-1
+2
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Chooses the tray that will be used for the copy operation.
Page
See
1
.
Adjusts the brightness for copies.
Adjusts the contrast for copies.
You can choose to stack or sort multiple copies.
You can make N in 1 and 2 in 1 ID copies.
Adjusts the red colour for copies.
170
Menu and features
Level 1
Color Adjust
(Continued)
Level 2
—
Level 3
—
Options 1
Green
Blue
Options 2
-2
+1
+2
-1
0
0
+1
-2
-1
Descriptions
Adjusts the green colour for copies.
Adjusts the blue colour for copies.
+2
Set New Default
— —
Quality
Brightness
Contrast
Color Adjust
—
— You can save your copy settings as the default settings.
Factory Reset
Favorite Settings
Favorite
—
Store
—
Favorite:1
Favorite:2
Favorite:3
Rename
Rename
Rename
—
Quality
Enlarge/Reduce
You can restore all copy settings to the factory settings.
You can save your
Favorite settings.
Duplex Copy
Tray Use
Brightness
Contrast
Stack / Sort
Rename
—
Favorite:1
Rename
Favorite:2
Rename
Favorite:3
Rename
—
Favorite:1
Favorite:2
Favorite:3
1
See Advanced User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page Layout
Color Adjust
—
—
—
—
You can rename your
Favorite settings.
You can apply your
Favorite settings as the default settings.
Page
See
1
.
C
171
SCAN ( )
Level 1 Level 2
Scan to USB Quality
File Type
Duplex Scan
File Name
Level 3
—
—
—
—
Level 4
—
—
—
—
Options
Color 100 dpi
*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Descriptions
You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
(If you chose a
Color or Gray option in the
Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
JPEG
XPS
(If you chose a
B&W option in the Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
TIFF
Off
*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge
DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
—
Chooses the duplex scanning format.
Enter a file name for the scanned data.
1
Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page
See
1
.
C
172
Menu and features
Level 1
Scan to USB
(Continued)
Scan to Network
Level 2 Level 3
Glass ScanSize
—
File Size
Set New Default
Factory Reset
(Profile name)
—
—
—
Quality
Level 4
—
—
—
—
—
Options
A4
*
Letter
Legal/Folio
Small
Middle
*
Descriptions
To scan a Letter,
Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.
Large
Quality
File Type
Glass ScanSize
You can save your scan to USB settings as the default settings.
Page
See
1
.
File Size
—
Color 100 dpi
*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
You can restore all scan to USB settings to the factory settings.
You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
File Type
—
B&W 200x100 dpi
(If you chose a
Color or Gray option in the
Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
JPEG
XPS
1
Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
173
Level 1
Scan to Network
(Continued)
Level 2
(Profile name)
(Continued)
Level 3
File Type
(Continued)
Duplex Scan
Glass ScanSize
File Size
File Name
Level 4
—
—
—
—
—
Options
(If you chose a
B&W option in the Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
Descriptions
TIFF
Off
*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge
Chooses the duplex scanning format.
DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
A4
*
Letter
Legal/Folio
Small
Middle
*
To scan a Letter,
Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.
Large
BRNXXXXXXXXXX
Estimate
Report
*
Order sheet
Contract sheet
You can choose preset file names. If you choose
<Manual>
, you can name the file as you like.
Check
Receipt
<Manual>
1
Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page
See
1
.
174
Menu and features
Level 1 Level 2
Scan to FTP
(Profile name)
Level 3
Quality
File Type
Duplex Scan
Glass ScanSize
Level 4
—
—
—
—
Signed PDF
JPEG
XPS
(If you chose a
B&W option in the Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
TIFF
Off
*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge
DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
A4
*
Letter
Legal/Folio
Options
Color 100 dpi
*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Descriptions
You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
(If you chose a
Color or Gray option in the
Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Chooses the duplex scanning format.
To scan a Letter,
Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
1
Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page
See
1
.
C
175
Level 1
Scan to FTP
(Continued)
Scan to E-mail
Level 2
(Profile name)
(Continued)
Manual
/
Address Book
Level 3
File Size
File Name
Quality
Level 4
—
—
—
File Type
—
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
(If you chose a
Color or Gray option in the
Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
JPEG
XPS
1
Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Options
Small
Middle
*
Large
BRNXXXXXXXXXX
*
Estimate
Descriptions
You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.
Report
Order sheet
Contract sheet
Check
You can choose preset file names. If you choose
<Manual>
, you can name the file as you like.
Page
See
1
.
Receipt
<Manual>
Color 100 dpi
*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.
Color 600 dpi
176
Menu and features
Level 1
Scan to E-mail
(Continued)
Level 2
Manual
/
Address Book
(Continued)
Level 3
File Type
(Continued)
Level 4
—
Options
(If you chose a
B&W option in the Quality setting)
*
PDF/A
Secure PDF
Signed PDF
Descriptions
Duplex Scan
—
TIFF
Off
*
DuplexScan
:LongEdge
Chooses the duplex scanning format.
Scan to PC E-mail
Image
Glass ScanSize
File Size
Number of
Destinations
Set New Default
Factory Reset
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DuplexScan
:ShortEdge
A4
*
Letter
Legal/Folio
Small
Middle
*
To scan a Letter,
Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.
Large
—
Quality
File Type
Glass ScanSize
You can add multiple destination E-mail addresses.
You can save your scan to E-mail settings as the default settings.
File Size
—
—
—
You can restore all scan to E-mail settings to the factory settings.
You can scan a monochrome or a colour document into your E-mail application.
You can scan a colour picture into your graphics application.
1
Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Page
See
1
.
C
177
Level 1
Scan to PC
(Continued)
Level 2
OCR
File
Level 3
—
—
Level 4
—
—
Options
—
—
1
Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can have your text document converted to an editable text file.
You can scan a monochrome or a colour document into your computer.
Page
See
1
.
178
Menu and features
Other Functions
Level 1 Level 2
Direct Print
(Select File)
Level 3
Print Settings
/
(Copy Pages
(001–999))
Level 4 Options
Paper Size A4
*
Letter
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Descriptions
Sets the paper size when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.
Page
Folio
Paper Type
Thin
Plain
*
Thick
Sets the print media type when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.
Thicker
Recycled Paper
Glossy
Multiple Page 1in1
*
2in1
4in1
9in1
16in1
25in1
Sets the page layout when printing multiple pages directly from the USB
Flash memory drive.
1 in 2x2 pages
1 in 3x3 pages
1 in 4x4 pages
1 in 5x5 pages
Orientation
Duplex
Portrait
Off
*
*
Landscape
Long Edge
Short Edge
Sets the page orientation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.
Chooses the duplex print format when print directly from the
USB Flash memory drive.
1
See Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.
C
C
179
Level 1
Direct Print
(Continued)
Level 2
(Select File)
(Continued)
Level 3
Print Settings
/
(Copy Pages
(001–999))
(Continued)
Level 4
Collate
Tray Use
Options
On
*
Off
Auto
*
MP Only
Tray#1 Only
Descriptions
Enables or disables page collation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.
Chooses the tray when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.
Page
Index Print
Default Settings
—
Paper Size
Tray#2 Only
(Tray#2 Only appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)
Print Quality Normal
*
PDF Option
—
—
Fine
Document
Document&Markup
Document&Stamps
—
A4
*
Letter
Legal
*
Executive
Sets the print quality option when printing directly from the USB
Flash memory drive.
Sets the USB direct print setting whether to print comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file along with the text.
You can print a thumbnail page.
Sets the default paper size when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio
1
See Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.
180
Menu and features
Level 1
Direct Print
(Continued)
Level 2
Default Settings
(Continued)
Level 3 Level 4
Paper Type
—
Multiple Page
—
Options
Thin
Plain
*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper
Descriptions
Sets the default media type when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.
Page
Glossy
1in1
2in1
4in1
*
9in1
16in1
25in1
1 in 2x2 pages
Sets the default page style when printing multiple pages directly from the USB
Flash memory drive.
1 in 3x3 pages
1 in 4x4 pages
Orientation
Collate
Print Quality
PDF Option
Index Print
—
—
—
—
—
1 in 5x5 pages
Portrait
*
Landscape
On
*
Off
Normal
Fine
Document&Markup
Document&Stamps
Simple
*
Document
*
Details
*
Sets the default page orientation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.
Enables or disables default page collation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.
Sets the default print quality option when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.
Sets the default USB direct print setting whether to print comments (Markup) or stamps in the PDF file along with the text.
Sets the default index print option, simple format or details.
1
See Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.
C
181
Level 1 Level 2
Secure Print
(Select User)
Level 3
(Select Secure
Print Job)
Level 4
Password:
Options
Delete
Descriptions
You can print data saved in the memory drive when you enter your four-digit password.
Page
See
1
.
(The Secure Print button on the LCD becomes active when there is secure data.)
1
See Software User's Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.
182
Menu and features
Entering text
When you are setting certain menu selections, you may need to enter text into the machine.
Press to choose numbers, letters or special characters. Up to six letters are assigned to each button on the LCD.
By pressing the correct button repeatedly, you can access the character you want.
C
Inserting spaces
To enter a space, press to choose special characters, then press the space button or .
Note
The characters available may differ depending on your country.
Making corrections
If you entered an incorrect character and want to change it, use the arrow buttons to move the cursor under the incorrect character. Then press . Re-enter the correct character. You can also insert letters by moving the cursor and entering a character.
Repeating letters
If you need to enter a letter that is on the same button as the letter before it, press c to move the cursor to the right before you press the same button again.
C
183
D
Specifications
General
Note
This chapter provides a summary of the machine’s specifications. For additional specifications visit http://www.brother.com/ for details.
D
1
2
3
Printer Type
Print Method
Memory Capacity
LCD (liquid crystal display)
Power Source
Power Consumption
Laser
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam scanning
256 MB
Touchscreen 5 in. (12.6 cm) Colour LCD
220 - 240 V AC 50/60Hz
Peak:
Copying (Average):
Sleep (WLAN: On)
(Average):
Deep Sleep (Average):
Ready (Average):
Measured diagonally
USB connection to PC
When making a copy from one sheet
1200 W
Approx. 615 W
Approx. 10 W
Approx. 1.8 W
Approx. 75 W
Dimensions
D
530 mm
490 mm
With Consumables: 28.5 kg
526 mm
Weight
184
Specifications
Noise level
1
Sound power
Operating
(Colour Copying):
Operating
(Monochrome Copying):
L
L
WA
WA d = 6.70 B (A) d = 6.67 B (A)
Office equipment with L
WA d > 6.30 B (A) is not suitable for use in room where people do primarily intellectual work. Such equipment should be placed in separate rooms because of the noise emission.
Ready:
Sound pressure
L
WA d = 4.21 B (A)
Operating (Printing):
Ready:
L
PA m = 57 dB (A)
L
PA m = 33 dB (A)
Measured in accordance with ISO 9296.
Temperature
Humidity
ADF (automatic document feeder)
Operating:
Storage:
10 to 32.5
°C
0 to 40
°C
20 to 80% (without condensation) Operating:
Storage: 10 to 90% (without condensation)
Up to 50 pages (Staggered) [80 g/m
2
]
185
D
Document Size
Document Size
(Single-sided)
Document Size
(2-sided (Duplex))
ADF Width: 147.3 to 215.9 mm
ADF Length: 147.3 to 356.0 mm
Scanner Glass
Width:
Max. 215.9 mm
Scanner Glass
Length:
Max. 355.6 mm
ADF Width: 147.3 to 215.9 mm
ADF Length: 147.3 to 356.0 mm
D
186
Specifications
Print media
D
Paper Input Paper Tray
Paper Type:
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Maximum Paper Tray
Capacity:
Plain paper, Thin paper or Recycled paper
Letter, A4, B5 (ISO/JIS), A5, A5 (Long
Edge), B6 (ISO), A6, Executive, Legal and
Folio
60 to 105 g/m
2
Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain paper
Multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
Paper Type:
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Maximum Paper Tray
Capacity:
Paper Tray 2 (option)
Paper Type:
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Maximum Paper Tray
Capacity:
Paper Output Face-Down Output Tray
Face-Up Output Tray
Envelope, Env. Thin, Env. Thick, Labels
Glossy paper, Thin paper, Thick paper,
Thicker paper, Recycled paper,
Bond paper or Plain paper
,
Width: 69.8 to 216 mm
Length: 116 to 406.4 mm
60 to 163 g/m
2
Up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain paper
Plain paper, Thin paper or Recycled paper
Letter, A4, B5 (ISO/JIS), A5, B6 (ISO),
Executive, Legal and Folio
60 to 105 g/m
2
Up to 500 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain paper
Up to 150 sheets (face down print delivery to the Face-down output tray)
One sheet (face up print delivery to the
Face-up output tray)
D
187
Duplex
Printing
Manual Duplex:
Automatic Duplex:
Paper Size
(Automatic Duplex):
Paper Weight
(Automatic Duplex):
Paper Type
(Automatic Duplex):
Yes
Yes
A4
60 to 105 g/m
2
Plain paper, Thin paper, Recycled paper or
Glossy paper
1
For labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the possibility of smudging.
188
Specifications
Fax
Compatibility
Modem Speed
2-sided (Duplex) Print
Receiving
Automatic 2-sided (Duplex)
Sending
Scanning Width
Printing Width
Greyscale
Resolution
One Touch Dial
Speed Dial
Groups
Broadcasting
Automatic Redial
Memory Transmission
Out of Paper Reception
ITU-T Super Group 3
Automatic Fallback:
Yes
Yes (from ADF)
33,600 bps
Max. 208 mm
Max. 208 mm
8 bit/256 levels
Horizontal:
Vertical
Standard:
8 dot/mm
3.85 line/mm (Mono)
Fine:
7.7 line/mm (Colour)
7.7 line/mm (Mono)
Photo:
Superfine:
40 (20
× 2)
300 stations
7.7 line/mm (Colour)
7.7 line/mm (Mono)
15.4 line/mm (Mono)
Up to 20
390 stations
3 times at 5 minute intervals
Up to 500
Up to 500
1
2
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.
Black & White only
D
D
189
Copy
Colour/Black
Copy Width
Automatic 2-sided (Duplex)
Copy
Yes/Yes
Max. 210 mm
Yes (from ADF)
Multiple Copies
Reduce/Enlarge
Resolution
First Copy Out Time
(Monochrome)
Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)
Up to 1200
× 600 dpi
Less than 19 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)
First Copy Out Time (Colour) Less than 21 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)
D
190
Specifications
Scanner
Colour/Black
TWAIN Compliant
WIA Compliant
ICA Compliant
Colour Depth
Resolution
Yes/Yes
Yes (Windows
®
Windows
®
2000 Professional/Windows
®
XP/
XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista
®
/
Windows
®
7)
Mac OS X 10.4.11 – 10.6.x
Yes (Windows
®
XP/Windows Vista
®
/Windows
®
7)
Yes (Mac OS X 10.6.x)
48 bit internal / 24 bit external colour
Up to 19200 × 19200 dpi (interpolated)
Up to 1200
× 2400 dpi (optical)
Up to 1200
Max. 210 mm
Yes (from ADF)
1
2
Scanning Width
Automatic 2-sided
(Duplex) Scanning
Greyscale
256 levels
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
Maximum 1200
× 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows
®
XP, Windows Vista
®
and Windows
®
7
(resolution up to 19200
× 19200 dpi can be chosen by using the scanner utility)
D
191
D
Printer
Automatic 2-sided
(Duplex) Print
Emulations
Resolution
Print Speed
(Monochrome Duplex)
Print Speed
(Colour Duplex)
Print Speed
(Monochrome)
Print Speed
(Colour)
First Print Out Time
(Monochrome)
First Print Out Time
(Colour)
Yes
PCL6, BR-Script3 (PostScript
®
3™)
600 dpi
× 600 dpi, 2400 dpi (2400 × 600) quality
Up to 14 sides/minute (7 sheets/minute)
Up to 14 sides/minute (7 sheets/minute)
Up to 28 pages/minute (A4 size)
Up to 28 pages/minute (A4 size)
Less than 16 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)
Less than 16 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)
1
The print speed may vary depending on the type of document you print.
D
192
Specifications
Interfaces
USB
It is recommended you use a USB 2.0 cable (Type A/B) that is no
Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.
2
3
1
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11 b/g (Infrastructure / Ad-hoc Mode)
Your machine has a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a
USB 1.1 interface.
Third party USB ports are not supported.
See Network (LAN) on page 199 and the Network User's Guide for detailed network specifications.
D
193
D
Direct Print feature
Compatibility
Interface
PDF version 1.7
, JPEG, Exif + JPEG, PRN (created by Brother
printer driver), TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or DCP models),
PostScript
®
3™ (created by Brother BR-Script 3 printer driver), XPS version 1.0.
USB direct interface
1
PDF data including a JBIG2 image file, a JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not supported.
D
194
Scan to USB feature
File formats
Black and white
TIFF, PDF, PDF/A, Secure PDF, Signed PDF
Color and Gray document
JPEG, PDF, PDF/A, Secure PDF, Signed PDF, XPS
Specifications
D
195
D
Computer requirements
Computer Platform &
Operating System
Version
Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions
Processor
Minimum Speed
Minimum
RAM
Recommended
RAM
Hard Disk Space to install
For
Drivers
For
Applications
Supported
PC
Software
Functions
Windows
®
Operating
System
Windows
®
2000
Windows
Vista
Windows
®
XP
Home
Windows
®
XP
Windows
®
XP
Professional x64
Intel
®
Pentium
®
II or equivalent
64-bit (Intel
®
AMD64)
64 or supported CPU
64 MB 256 MB 150 MB 500 MB Printing,
PC-Fax
Scanning
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
512 MB
1 GB 500 MB 1.2 GB
Windows
®
Intel
®
Pentium
®
4 or equivalent
64-bit (Intel
®
64 or
AMD64) supported CPU
Intel
®
Pentium
®
4 or equivalent
64-bit (Intel
®
64 or
AMD64) supported CPU
1 GB
(32-bit)
2 GB
(64-bit)
1 GB
(32-bit)
2 GB
(64-bit)
650 MB
Supported
PC
Interface
USB,
10/100
Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11 b/g
D
196
Specifications
Computer Platform &
Operating System
Version
Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions
Processor
Minimum Speed
Minimum
RAM
Recommended
RAM
Hard Disk Space to install
For
Drivers
For
Applications
Supported
PC
Software
Functions
Windows
Server
®
2003
(print only via network)
Intel
®
Pentium or equivalent
®
III
256 MB 512 MB 50 MB N/A
Supported
PC
Printing 10/100
Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11 b/g
Windows
Server
®
2003 x64
Edition
(print only via network)
Windows
Server
®
2008
(print only via network)
Windows
Server
®
2008 R2
(print only via network)
Mac OS X
10.4.11
10.5.x
64-bit (Intel
AMD64) supported CPU
Intel
®
Pentium or equivalent
64-bit (Intel
®
AMD64)
®
4
64 or supported CPU
64-bit (Intel
AMD64)
®
®
64 or
64 or supported CPU
512 MB 2 GB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Macintosh
Operating
System
Mac OS X
10.6.x
PowerPC G4/G5
Intel
®
Core™
Processor
Intel
®
Core™
Processor
512 MB
1 GB
1 GB
2 GB
80 MB 400 MB Printing,
PC-Fax
Send
,
Scanning
USB,
10/100
Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11 b/g
Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or greater.
For WIA, 1200 x 1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.
Third party USB ports are not supported.
PC-Fax supports black and white only. (Letter/A4 size)
PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft
®
SP4 or higher for Windows
®
2000. (Available from the Internet)
PaperPort™ 12SE supports Microsoft
®
SP3 or higher for Windows
®
XP and SP2 or higher for Windows Vista
®
and
Windows
®
7.
For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/.
All trademarks, brand and product names are property of their respective companies.
D
197
Consumable items
Toner Cartridge Life
Drum Unit
Belt Unit
Waste Toner Box
Standard Toner Cartridge:
TN-320BK (Black):
TN-320C (Cyan):
TN-320M (Magenta):
TN-320Y (Yellow):
Approx. 2,500 pages
Approx. 1,500 pages
Approx. 1,500 pages
Approx. 1,500 pages
High Capacity Toner Cartridge:
TN-325BK (Black):
TN-325C (Cyan):
TN-325M (Magenta):
TN-325Y (Yellow):
Approx. 4,000 pages
Approx. 3,500 pages
Approx. 3,500 pages
Approx. 3,500 pages
Super High Capacity Toner Cartridge:
TN-328BK (Black): Approx. 6,000 pages
TN-328C (Cyan):
TN-328M (Magenta):
Approx. 6,000 pages
Approx. 6,000 pages
TN-328Y (Yellow):
DR-320CL
BU-300CL
WT-300CL
Approx. 6,000 pages
Approx. 25,000 pages
Approx. 50,000 pages
Approx. 50,000 pages
1
2
3
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.
Approx. yield is based on A4 or Letter single-sided pages.
198
D
Specifications
Network (LAN)
Note
For details about the full Network specifications, see Network User's Guide.
LAN
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,
Network Scanning, PC-Fax Send, PC-Fax Receive (Windows
®
only) and Remote Setup
. Also included is Brother BRAdmin Light
Network Management software.
Security Protocols
Wired
Wireless
Wireless Network
Security
Wireless Network
Setup Support Utility
APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS,
SMTP, POP), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAP-FAST, PEAP,
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos
APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS,
SMTP, POP), SNMP v3
WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), 802.1x
(LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS)
AOSS™
WPS
Yes
Yes
1
2
See Computer requirements on page 196.
BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.
D
199
D
E
Index
A
ADF (automatic document feeder) using
.....................................................26
Answering machine (TAD) connecting
.............................................37
Apple Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.
Automatic fax receive
.............................................33
Fax Detect
..........................................35
fax redial
...............................................43
B
Belt unit replacing
...............................................74
C
Cleaning corona wires
..........................................93
drum unit
...............................................97
laser scanner windows
scanner
.................................................88
Connecting external TAD (answering machine)
external telephone
................................39
Consumable items
Control panel overview
..............................6
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)
See Software User’s Guide.
ControlCenter4 (for Windows
®
)
See Software User’s Guide.
Cordless telephone (non-Brother)
D
Dialling a pause
.................................................44
automatic fax redial
...............................43
manual
..................................................42
One Touch
............................................42
Speed Dial
............................................42
using the Search
...................................43
Direct print
............................................... 52
Direct key
............................................. 53
specification
........................................ 194
Document how to load
..................................... 26
Drum unit cleaning
.......................................... 93
replacing
............................................... 68
E
Envelopes
............................. 15
Equalization
........................................... 137
Error messages on LCD
Comm. Error
....................................... 107
No Paper
............................................ 110
Out of Memory
.................................... 111
Print Unable XX
.................................. 111
Scan Unable XX
................................. 112
Extension telephone, using
External telephone, connecting
F
Fax codes changing
............................................... 41
remote activation code
remote deactivation code
Fax, stand-alone receiving fax detect
........................................... 35
from extension telephone
ring delay, setting
.............................. 34
telephone line interference
sending
................................................. 28
telephone line interference
Fax/Tel mode answering at extension telephones
F/T ring time (double-ring)
fax detect
.............................................. 35
receiving faxes
..................................... 39
remote activation code
remote deactivation code
ring delay
.............................................. 34
Folio
................................................... 18
200
G
Greyscale
...................................... 189
H
HELP
LCD messages
...................................147
Menu Table
.........................................148
L
Labels
...................................13
LCD (liquid crystal display)
M
Machine information how to reset the machine
reset functions
....................................145
serial number
......................................145
Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.
Maintenance, routine
...............................87
replacing belt unit
..............................................74
drum unit
............................................68
toner cartridge
....................................62
waste toner box
.................................80
Manual dialling
...................................................42
receive
..................................................33
Menu Table
............................................148
Mode, entering copy
......................................................51
fax
.........................................................28
scan
........................................................ 6
Multi-line connections (PBX)
N
Network faxing
See Software User’s Guide.
printing
See Network User’s Guide.
scanning
See Software User’s Guide.
O
One Touch changing
............................................... 49
setting up
.............................................. 46
using
..................................................... 42
Out of Memory message
P
Paper
............................................... 21
how to load
........................................... 11
in paper tray
...................................... 11
in the multi-purpose tray
recommended
................................ 21
,
size
................................................. 18
,
tray capacity
......................................... 22
type
................................................ 18
,
PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR
See Software User’s Guide and Help in the
PaperPort™ 12SE application to access
How-to-Guides.
PC-Fax
See Software User’s Guide.
Presto! PageManager
See Software User's Guide. See also Help in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print difficulties
................................... 128
drivers
................................................ 192
quality
......................................... 134
resolution
............................................ 192
specifications
...................................... 192
Printing
See Software User’s Guide.
Programming your machine
E
201
E
Q
Quality printing
....................................... 134
Quick dial
.................................................46
Group dial changing
............................................49
One Touch dial changing
............................................49
custom scan profile
............................46
setting up
...........................................46
using
..................................................42
search
...................................................43
Speed Dial changing
............................................49
custom scan profile
............................48
setting up
...........................................48
using
..................................................42
R
Redial/Pause key
.............................. 43
Remote setup
See Software User’s Guide.
Replacing belt unit
.................................................74
drum unit
...............................................68
toner cartridge
.......................................62
waste toner box
.....................................80
Reports
Transmission Verification
Resolution copy
....................................................190
fax (standard, fine, superfine, photo)
..................................................189
.....................................................192
scan
....................................................191
Ring delay, setting
...................................34
S
Scanner glass using
..................................................... 27
Scanning
See Software User’s Guide.
Serial number how to find ..............See inside front cover
Sockets
EXT external telephone
............................. 39
TAD (answering machine)
Speed Dial changing
............................................... 49
setting up
.............................................. 48
using
..................................................... 42
T
TAD (telephone answering device), external
.................................................... 33
connecting
............................................ 37
recording OGM
..................................... 38
Tel/R key
.......................................7
Telephone line connections
.......................................... 37
difficulties
............................................ 128
interference
........................................ 137
multi-line (PBX)
.................................... 38
Text, entering
........................................ 183
Toner cartridge replacing
............................................... 62
Troubleshooting
..................................... 128
document jam
............................. 115
error messages on LCD
if you are having difficulty copy quality
..................................... 131
incoming calls
.................................. 131
network
............................................ 135
paper handling
................................ 134
print quality
.............................. 134
printing
.................................... 128
receiving faxes
................................ 129
scanning
.......................................... 133
sending faxes
.................................. 130
software
........................................... 133
telephone line
.................................. 137
maintenance messages on LCD
paper jam
202
V
VoIP
.......................................................137
Volume, setting beeper
...................................................10
ring
........................................................10
speaker
.................................................10
W
Waste toner box replacing
...............................................80
Windows
®
See Software User’s Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User’s Guide.
E
203
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
ADVANCED
USER’S GUIDE
MFC-9970CDW
Version 0
UK/IRE
i
User's Guides and where do I find it?
Which manual?
Safety and Legal
Quick Setup Guide
Basic User's Guide
Network Glossary
Network User's Guide
What's in it?
Read this Guide first. Please read the
Safety Instructions before you set up your machine. See this Guide for trademarks and legal limitations.
Follow the instructions for setting up your machine and installing the drivers and software for the operating system and connection type you are using.
Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and
Direct Print operations and how to replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.
Advanced User's Guide
Learn more advanced operations: Fax,
Copy, security features, printing reports and performing routine maintenance.
Software User's Guide
Follow these instructions for Printing,
Scanning, Network Scanning, Remote
Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.
This Guide provides basic information about advanced network features of
Brother machines along with explanations about general networking and common terms.
This Guide provides useful information about wired and wireless network settings and security settings using the
Brother machine. You can also find supported protocol information for your machine and detailed troubleshooting tips.
Where is it?
Printed / In the box
Printed / In the box
Printed / In the box
For
HUN/BUL/ROM/POL/SVK/CZE:
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
PDF file /
Documentation CD-ROM /
In the box
Table of Contents
1
2
3
General Setup 1
Security features 5
Setting and changing the Administrator Password.......................................... 6
Setting up and changing the Public user mode ............................................... 7
Setting up and changing restricted users ........................................................ 7
Turning Secure Function Lock on/off............................................................... 9
Changing your Setting Lock password ..........................................................12
Sending a fax 15
Sending faxes using multiple settings ........................................................... 15
Delayed batch transmission (black & white only) ..........................................20
Checking and cancelling waiting jobs............................................................ 21
Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 21
Restoring all fax settings to the factory settings ............................................21
Electronic cover page (black & white only).................................................... 22
ii
iii
4
5
6
Receiving a fax 25
Changing Remote Fax Options .....................................................................28
Duplex (2-sided) printing for Fax mode .........................................................32
Setting the Fax Receive Stamp (black & white only).....................................33
Dialling and storing numbers 37
Setting up Groups for Broadcasting ..............................................................38
Printing reports 43
7
A
B
C
D
Making copies 45
Enlarging or reducing the image copied ........................................................46
Making N in 1 copies (page layout) ...............................................................49
Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 52
Restoring all copy settings to the factory settings ......................................... 52
Routine maintenance 54
Options 66
Glossary 69
Index 73
iv
v
1
General Setup
1
Memory storage
Your menu settings are stored permanently, and in the event of a power failure will not be lost. Temporary settings (for example,
Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost. Also, during a power failure the machine will retain the date and time and programed fax timer jobs (e.g. Delayed Fax) for up to 60 hours.
Other fax jobs in the machine memory will not be lost.
1
Automatic daylight savings time
You can set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Savings Time. It will set itself forward one hour in the Spring, and back one hour in the Autumn.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup
.
Press Initial Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Date&Time.
Press Date&Time.
d
Press Auto Daylight.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
1
1
1
2
Chapter 1
Ecology features
Toner Save
You can save toner using this feature. When you set Toner Save to On, prints appear lighter. The default setting is Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Ecology.
Press Ecology.
d
Press Toner Save.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
We do not recommend Toner Save for printing Photo or Greyscale images.
1
1
Sleep mode
The Sleep Mode Setting can reduce power consumption. When the machine is in Sleep
Mode (Power Save mode) it acts as though it were turned off. Receiving data or starting an operation wakes up the machine from Sleep mode to Ready mode.
The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine, such as receiving a fax or computer data or making a copy. The default setting is 3 minutes.
When the machine goes into Sleep mode, the
LCD back light turns off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Ecology.
Press Ecology.
d
Press Sleep Time.
e
Using the dial pad on the Touchscreen, enter the length of time the machine will remain idle before entering sleep mode.
Press OK.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
1
Deep Sleep mode
If the machine is in Sleep mode and does not receive any jobs for a certain length of time, the machine will go into Deep Sleep mode automatically. Deep Sleep mode uses less power than Sleep mode. The machine will wake up and start warming up when the machine receives a fax or computer data, or when you press the Touchscreen or a key on the control panel.
When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the LCD backlight is Off and the mode keys are dimmed.
If a wireless network is enabled, the machine will not enter Deep Sleep mode. To disable the wireless network, see Chapter 5 in the
Network User's Guide.
If the machine has secure print data it will not enter Deep Sleep mode.
1
General Setup
LCD screen
1
Setting the backlight brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight. If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, try changing the brightness setting.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
Press LCD Settings.
d
Press Backlight.
e
Press Light, Med or Dark.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
1
Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight
1
You can set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go back to the Ready screen.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
Press LCD Settings.
d
Press Dim Timer.
e
Press Off, 10 Secs, 20 Secs or
30 Secs
.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
1
3
4
Chapter 1
Mode Timer
The machine has three mode keys on the control panel: FAX, SCAN, and COPY.
You can set how much time the machine takes after the last Copy or Scan operation to return to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the machine will stay in the mode you used last.
This setting also sets the time the machine will change from a restricted user to the
Public mode when using Secure Function
Lock. (See Switching Users on page 10.)
1
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Mode Timer.
Press Mode Timer.
d
Press 0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,
2 Mins
, 5 Mins or Off.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
2
Security features
2
Secure Function Lock 2.0
2
Secure Function Lock lets you restrict Public access to the following machine functions:
Fax Tx
Fax Rx
Copy
Scan
Direct Print
Color Print
This feature also prevents users from changing the Default settings of the machine by limiting access to the MENU settings.
Before using the security features you must first enter an administrator password.
Access to restricted operations can be enabled by creating a restricted user.
Restricted users must enter a user password to use the machine.
Make a careful note of your password. If you forget it, you will have to reset the password stored in the machine. For information about how to reset the password call your Brother dealer for service.
Note
• Secure Function Lock can be set manually at the control panel or by using Web
Based Management. We recommend using Web Based Management to configure this feature. For more information, see the Network User's
Guide.
• Only administrators can set limitations and make changes for each user.
• Polling Receive is enabled only when both
Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.
2
5
6
Chapter 2
Setting and changing the
Administrator Password
Setting up the password
The password you set in these steps is for the administrator. This password is used to set up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on
or off. (See Setting up and changing
restricted users on page 7 and Turning
Secure Function Lock on/off on page 9.)
2
Note
Make a careful note of the administrator password. If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will show
Wrong Password
. Re-enter the correct password. If you forget it, please call your
Brother dealer for service.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Enter a four-digit number for the password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
f
Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.
Press OK.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
2
Changing the password
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Press Set Password.
f
Enter the registered four-digit password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
Enter a four-digit number for the new password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
h
Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.
Press OK.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
2
Setting up and changing the
Public user mode
2
Public user mode restricts the functions that are available for Public users. Public users do not need to enter a password to access the features made available through this setting.
You can set up one Public user.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Press Setup ID.
f
Enter the administrator password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
Press a or b to display Public.
Press Public.
h
Do one of the following:
To set up the Public user, press
Enable
or Disable for each operation, as follows: Press Fax Tx.
Then press Enable or Disable.
After you have set Fax Tx, repeat these steps for Fax Rx, Copy,
Scan
, Direct Print, Print and
Color Print
.
To change the Public user settings, pressa or b to display the setting you want to change. Press the setting and press Enable or Disable.
Repeat this step until you finish changing settings.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Security features
Setting up and changing restricted users
You can set up users with restrictions and a password for functions that are available to them. You can set up more advanced restrictions, such as by page count or PC user login name, through Web Based
Management. (For more information, see the
Network User's Guide.) You can set up to 25 restricted users with restrictions and a password.
2
2
Setting up restricted users
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Press Setup ID.
f
Enter the four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
Press a or b to display User01.
Press User01.
h
Enter the user name by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. (See
Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic
User's Guide.)
Press OK.
i
Enter a four-digit user password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
7
8
Chapter 2 j
To set up a restricted user, press
Enable
or Disable for each operation, as follows: Press Fax Tx. Then press
Enable
or Disable. After you have set
Fax Tx
, repeat these steps for
Fax Rx
, Copy, Scan, Direct Print,
and Color Print.
k
Repeat steps g to j for entering each
additional user and password.
l
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You cannot use the same name as another user's name.
Changing user name, password or settings for restricted users
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Press Setup ID.
f
Enter the four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
Press a or b to display the existing restricted user you want to change.
Press the user name.
h
Press Change.
To change the user name, enter a new user name by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. (See Entering text in
Appendix C of the Basic User's Guide.)
Press OK.
2
i
To change the password, enter a new four-digit user password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
j
To change a restricted user's settings, press a or b to display the setting you want to change. Press the setting and then press Enable or Disable.
Repeat this step until you are finished making changes.
k
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You cannot use the same name as another user's name.
Reset existing restricted users
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Press Setup ID.
f
Enter the four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
Press a or b to display the existing restricted user you want to reset.
Press the user name.
h
Press Reset.
i
Press Yes to reset the existing restricted user.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
2
Turning Secure Function
Lock on/off
Turning Secure Function Lock on
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Press Lock OffiOn.
f
Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
Security features
Turning Secure Function Lock off
a
Press Public or xxxxx (where xxxxx is the user’s name).
b
Press Lock OniOff.
c
Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will show Wrong Password. Re-enter the correct password.
2
9
Chapter 2
Switching Users
This setting allows you to switch between registered restricted users or Public mode when Secure Function Lock is turned on.
Changing to the restricted user Mode
a
Press Public or xxxxx (where xxxxx is the user’s name).
Press Change User.
b
Press a or b to display your user name.
c
Press your user name.
d
Enter the registered four-digit user password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
Changing to the Public Mode
a
Press xxxxx. (where xxxxx is the user’s name.) b
Press Go to Public.
Note
• After a restricted user has finished using the machine, it will return to the Public setting within the same time as the Mode
Timer setting. (See Mode Timer on page 4.)
• If your ID has set page limit restrictions and already reached the maximum number of pages, the LCD will show
Limit Exceeded
when you print data.
Contact your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.
• If your ID has set Colour Print restrictions to Disable, the LCD will show
No Permission
when you try to print coloured data. The machine prints the data in black & white only.
10
Setting Lock
Setting Lock lets you set a password to stop other people from accidentally changing your machine settings.
Make a careful note of your password. If you forget it, you will have to reset the passwords stored in the machine. Please call your administrator or your Brother dealer.
While Setting Lock is On, you cannot access
MENU
and Address Book Functions.
Also, machine settings cannot be changed through the Remote Setup utility while Setting
Lock is On.
2
Security features
Setting up the password
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Setting Lock.
e
Enter a four-digit number for the password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
f
Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.
Press OK.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
2
2
11
Chapter 2
Changing your Setting Lock password
2
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Setting Lock.
e
Press Set Password.
f
Enter the registered four-digit password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
Enter a four-digit number for the new password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
h
Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.
Press OK.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Turning Setting Lock on/off
If you enter the wrong password when following the instructions below, the LCD will show Wrong Password. Re-enter the correct password.
Turning Setting Lock on
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup
.
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display Security.
Press Security.
d
Press Setting Lock.
e
Press Lock OffiOn.
f
Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
Turning Setting Lock off
a
Press Setting Lock on the LCD.
b
Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
12
Restricting dialling
This feature is to prevent users from sending a fax or call to a wrong number by mistake.
You can set the machine to restrict dialling by using the dial pad, One Touch and Speed
Dial.
If you choose Off, the machine does not restrict the dialling method.
If you choose Enter # twice, the machine will prompt you to re-enter the number, and then if you re-enter the same number correctly, the machine will start dialling. If you re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will show an error message.
If you choose On, the machine will restrict all fax sending and outbound calls for that dialling method.
2
Dial pad restriction
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict
.
Press Dial Restrict.
d
Press Dial Pad.
e
Press Off, Enter # twice or On.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
2
Security features
One Touch restriction
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict
.
Press Dial Restrict.
d
Press One Touch Dial.
e
Press Off, Enter # twice or On.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Speed Dial restriction
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict
.
Press Dial Restrict.
d
Press Speed Dial.
e
Press Off, Enter # twice or On.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
2
2
2
13
Chapter 2
LDAP server restriction
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Dial Restrict
.
Press Dial Restrict.
d
Press LDAP server.
e
Press Off, Enter # twice or On.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• The Enter # twice setting will not work if you lift an external handset before entering the number. You will not be asked to re-enter the number.
• The machine cannot restrict dialling from
Redial/Pause.
• If you chose On or Enter # twice, you cannot use the Broadcasting feature and cannot combine quick dial numbers when dialling.
2
14
3
Sending a fax
3
Additional sending options
Sending faxes using multiple settings
3
Before you send a fax, you can change any combination of these settings: duplex fax, contrast, resolution, overseas mode, delayed fax timer, polling transmission, real time transmission, broadcast, glass scan size or cover page settings.
a
Press
The LCD shows:
FAX
Duplex Fax Fax Resolution
Address Book
Off Standard
3
Changing a 2-sided fax layout
3
You need to choose the duplex scanning format before you send a 2-sided fax. The format you choose will depend on the layout of your 2-sided document.
a
Press b
Press d or c to display Duplex Fax.
Press Duplex Fax.
c
Do one of the following:
If your document is flipped on the
Long edge, press
DuplexScan :LongEdge
.
3
Long edge
Portrait Landscape b
Press d or c to display a setting you want to change and press the setting, then press the option you want.
c
Do one of the following:
settings.
If you are finished choosing settings, go to the next step for sending your fax.
Note
• Most settings are temporary and the machine returns to its default settings after you send a fax.
• You can save some of the settings you use most often by setting them as the default. These settings will stay until you
change them again. (See Setting your
changes as the new default on page 21.)
If your document is flipped on the
Short edge, press
DuplexScan :ShortEdge
.
Short edge
Portrait Landscape d
Press Stop/Exit.
15
Chapter 3
Contrast
For most documents the default setting of
Auto
will give the best results.
Auto
automatically chooses the suitable contrast for your document.
If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast may improve the quality of the fax.
Use Dark to make the faxed document lighter.
Use Light to make the faxed document darker.
a
Press b
Press d or c to display Contrast.
Press Contrast.
c
Press Auto, Light or Dark.
Note
Even if you choose Light or Dark, the machine will send the fax using the Auto setting if you choose Photo as the Fax
Resolution.
3
Changing Fax Resolution
The quality of a fax can be improved by changing the Fax Resolution. Resolution can be changed for the next fax.
a
Press b
Press d or c to display
Fax Resolution
.
Press Fax Resolution.
c
Press Standard, Fine, S.Fine or
Photo
.
Note
You can choose four different resolution settings for black & white faxes and two for colour.
3
Black & white
Standard
Fine
S.Fine
Photo
Suitable for most typed documents.
Good for small print and transmits a little slower than
Standard resolution.
Good for small print or artwork and transmits slower than Fine resolution.
Use when the document has varying shades of grey or is a photograph. This has the slowest transmission time.
Colour
Standard
Fine
Suitable for most typed documents.
Use when the document is a photograph. The transmission time is slower than Standard resolution.
If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then use the Colour Start key to send a fax, the machine will send the fax using the
Fine
setting.
16
Additional sending operations
Sending a fax manually
Manual transmission
Manual transmission lets you hear the dialling, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.
3
a
Make sure you are in Fax mode
(FAX).
b
Load your document.
c
Pick up the handset of an external telephone and listen for a dial tone.
d
Dial the fax number you want to call.
e
When you hear the fax tones, press
Mono Start or Colour Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, press Send.
f
Replace the handset of an external telephone.
3
3
Sending a fax
Dual access
(black & white only)
You can dial a number, and start scanning the fax into memory—even when the machine is sending from memory, receiving faxes or printing PC data. The LCD will show the new job number.
The number of pages you can scan into the memory will vary depending on the data that is printed on them.
Note
If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning the first page of a fax, press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning a subsequent page, you can press Mono Start to send the pages scanned so far, or press Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.
3
3
17
Chapter 3
Broadcasting
(black & white only)
Broadcasting lets you send the same fax message to more than one fax number. You can include Groups, One Touch, Speed Dial numbers and up to 50 manually dialled numbers in the same broadcast.
You can broadcast to up to 390 different numbers. This will depend on how many groups, access codes or credit card numbers you have stored, and on how many delayed or stored faxes in memory.
3
Before you begin the broadcast
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers must be stored in the machine's memory before they can be used in a broadcast. (See Storing One
Touch Dial numbers and Storing Speed Dial
numbers in Chapter 7 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Group numbers must also be stored in the machine's memory before they can be used in a broadcast. Group numbers include many stored One Touch Dial and Speed Dial
numbers for easier dialling. (See Setting up
Groups for Broadcasting on page 38.)
3
How to broadcast a fax
Note
To help you choose numbers easily, press
Address Book
or (Search).
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
Press Broadcasting.
d
You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:
Press Manual and enter a number by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen. (See How to dial in
Chapter 7 of the Basic User's Guide.)
Press OK.
Press Address Book. Press to search by Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Put a check in the check box beside each number you want to include in the broadcast.
Press OK.
3
Note
One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.
e
After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step d, press OK.
f
Press Mono Start.
After the broadcast is finished the machine will print a broadcast report to let you know the results.
Note
The scan profile of the One Touch,
Speed Dial or Group number you chose
first will be applied to the broadcast.
18
Cancelling a Broadcast in progress
While broadcasting you can cancel the fax currently being sent or the whole broadcast job.
3
a
PressStop/Exit.
b
Do one of the following:
To cancel the entire broadcast, press
Entire Broadcast
To cancel the current job, press the button that displays the number
To exit without cancelling, press
Stop/Exit.
c
When the LCD asks if you want to cancel the entire broadcast, do one of the following:
Press Yes to confirm.
To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.
d
Do one of the following:
To cancel the current job, press Yes.
To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.
Sending a fax
Real Time Transmission
When you are sending a fax, the machine will scan the documents into the memory before sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone line is free, the machine will start dialling and sending.
Sometimes, you may want to send an important document immediately, without waiting for memory transmission. You can turn on Real Time TX.
3
Note
• If the memory is full and you are sending a black and white fax from the ADF, the machine will send the document in real time (even if Real Time TX is set to Off). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be sent until you clear some of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Real Time TX.
Press Real Time TX.
d
Press On.
3
19
Chapter 3
Overseas Mode
If you are having difficulty sending a fax overseas due to a bad connection, then turning on Overseas Mode may help.
This is a temporary setting, and will only be active for your next fax.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display
Overseas Mode
.
Press Overseas Mode.
d
Press On.
3
Delayed Fax
(black & white only)
You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory to be sent within a twenty-four hour period.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Delayed Fax.
Press Delayed Fax.
d
Press On.
e
Enter the time you want the fax to be sent (in 24-hour format) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. (For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press OK.
Note
The number of pages you can scan into the memory depends on the amount of data printed on each page.
3
Delayed batch transmission
(black & white only)
3
Before sending the delayed faxes, your machine will help you economize by sorting all the faxes in the memory by destination and scheduled time.
All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be sent at the same time to the same fax number will be sent as one fax to save transmission time.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display Setup Send.
Press Setup Send.
d
Press Batch TX.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
20
Checking and cancelling waiting jobs
Check which jobs are still waiting in the memory to be sent. If there are no jobs, the
LCD will show No Jobs Waiting. You can cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in the memory.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Remaining Jobs
.
Press Remaining Jobs.
Jobs that are waiting will appear on the
LCD.
d
Press a or b to scroll through the jobs and press the job you want to cancel.
Press OK.
e
Do one of the following:
To cancel, press Yes. If you want to
cancel another job go to step d.
To exit without cancelling, press No.
f
When you have finished cancelling jobs, press Stop/Exit.
3
Sending a fax
Setting your changes as the new default
3
You can save the fax settings for
Fax Resolution
, Contrast,
Real Time TX
, Glass ScanSize and
Coverpage Setup
you use most often by setting them as the default. These settings will stay until you change them again.
a
Press b
Press d or c to choose the setting you want to change, and then press the new option.
Repeat this step for each setting you want to change.
c
After changing the last setting, press d or c to display
Set New Default
.
Press Set New Default.
d
Press Yes.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Restoring all fax settings to the factory settings
3
You can restore all the fax settings you have changed to the factory settings. These settings will stay until you change them again.
a
Press b
After changing the last setting, press d or c to display
Factory Reset
.
Press Factory Reset.
c
Press Yes.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
3
21
Chapter 3
Electronic cover page
(black & white only)
This feature will not work unless you have already programmed your Station ID. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)
You can automatically send a cover page with every fax. Your cover page includes your
Station ID, a comment, and the name (or number) stored in the One Touch or Speed
Dial memory.
By choosing On you can also display the number of pages on the cover page.
You can choose one of the following preset comments.
1.Comment Off
2.Please Call
3.Urgent
4.Confidential
Instead of using one of the preset comments, you can enter two personal messages of your own, up to 27 characters long. Use the chart on Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic
User's Guide for help entering characters.
(See Composing your own comments on page 22.)
5.
(User Defined)
6.
(User Defined)
3
Composing your own comments
You can set up two comments of your own.
3
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display Setup Send.
Press Setup Send.
d
Press Coverpage Setting.
e
Press Coverpage Note.
f
Press 5 or 6 to store your own comment.
g
Enter your own comment by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Use the chart on Entering text in
Appendix C of the Basic User's Guide for help entering characters.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
22
Send a cover page for all faxes
You can set the machine to send a cover page whenever you send a fax.
a
Press b
Press d or c to display
Coverpage Setup
.
Press Coverpage Setup.
c
Press On (or Off).
d
Press the comment you want to add.
e
Enter two digits to show the number of pages you are sending.
Press OK.
For example, enter 0, 2 for 2 pages or
0
, 0 to leave the number of pages blank.
If you make a mistake, press Clear to back up and re-enter the number of pages.
3
Sending a fax
Using a printed cover page
If you want to use a printed cover page that you can write on, you can print the sample page and attach it to your fax.
3
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display Setup Send.
Press Setup Send.
d
Press Coverpage Setting.
e
Press Print Sample.
f
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
g
After the machine prints a copy of your cover page, press Stop/Exit.
3
23
Chapter 3
Polling overview
Polling lets you set up your machine so other people can receive faxes from you, but they pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it, so you pay for the call. The polling feature needs to be set up on both machines for this to work. Not all fax machines support polling.
3
Polled transmit
(black & white only)
Polled transmit lets you set up your machine to wait with a document so another fax machine can call and retrieve it.
3
Setup for polled transmit
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Polled TX.
Press Polled TX.
d
Press Standard.
e
Press Mono Start.
f
If you are using the scanner glass, the
LCD will prompt you to choose one of the following options:
Press Yes to scan another page.
Press No or Mono Start to send the document.
g
Place the next page on the scanner glass and press Mono Start. Repeat
steps f and g for each additional
page.
h
Your machine will automatically send the fax.
3
Note
The document will be stored and can be retrieved from any other fax machine until you delete the fax from memory.
To delete the fax from memory, press
MENU
, Fax, Remaining Jobs. (See
Checking and cancelling waiting jobs on page 21.)
Setup for polled transmit with a secure code
3
Secure polling lets you restrict who can get the documents you set up to be polled.
Secure polling only works with Brother fax machines. If another person wants to retrieve a fax from your machine they will have to enter the secure code.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Polled TX.
Press Polled TX.
d
Press Secure.
e
Enter a four-digit number.
Press OK.
f
Press Mono Start.
g
If you are using the scanner glass, the
LCD will prompt you to choose one of the following options:
Press Yes to scan another page. Go
Press No or Mono Start to send the document.
h
Place the next page on the scanner glass and press Mono Start. Repeat
steps g and h for each additional
page.
i
Your machine will automatically send the fax.
24
4
Receiving a fax
4
Remote Fax Options
(black & white only)
Remote Fax Options are NOT available for colour faxes.
Remote Fax Options let you receive faxes while you are away from the machine.
You can use only one Remote Fax Option at a time.
4
Out of Paper Reception
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty during fax reception, the LCD shows
No Paper
. Put some paper in the paper tray.
(See Loading paper and print media in
Chapter 2 of the Basic User's Guide.)
The machine will carry on receiving the fax, with the remaining pages being stored in memory, if enough memory is available.
Incoming faxes will continue to be stored in the memory until the memory becomes full or paper is loaded in the paper tray. When the memory is full the machine will stop automatically answering calls. To print the faxes, put fresh paper in the tray.
4
Fax Forwarding
The Fax Forwarding feature lets you automatically forward your received faxes to another machine. If you choose Backup Print
On, the machine will also print the fax.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display
Forward/Store
.
Press Forward/Store.
e
Press Fax Forward.
f
Do one of the followings:
Press Manual to enter the forwarding fax number (up to 20 characters) or E-mail address (up to
60 characters) using the buttons on the Touchscreen. (See Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Press OK.
Press Address Book.
Press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or E-mail address you want your faxes to be forward to.
Press the fax number or E-mail address you want to use.
4
4
25
Chapter 4
Note
• You can enter an E-mail address by pressing on the Touchscreen.
• You can display your stored numbers and
E-mail addresses in alphabetical order by
• You cannot enter a forwarding number using a One Touch key on the control panel.
• Depending on the E-mail address you choose, you will be asked for the File
Type. Choose TIFF or PDF and go to
• If you choose a Group number from the
Address Book, the faxes will be forwarded to multiple fax numbers.
g
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off
.
IMPORTANT
If you choose Backup Print On, the machine will also print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.
This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
Fax Storage
The Fax Storage feature lets you store your received faxes in the machine’s memory. You can retrieve stored fax messages from a fax machine at another location using the remote
retrieval commands. (See Retrieving fax
messages on page 30.) Your machine will
automatically print a copy of the stored fax.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display
Forward/Store
.
Press Forward/Store.
e
Press Fax Storage.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
4
26
PC-Fax Receive
If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature your machine will store received faxes in memory and send them to your PC automatically. You can then use your PC to view and store these faxes.
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night or the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and store your faxes in its memory. The number of received faxes that are stored in the memory will appear on the
LCD.
When you start your PC and the PC-Fax
Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.
To transfer the received faxes to your PC you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX
Receiving in the Software User's Guide.) a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display
Forward/Store
.
Press Forward/Store.
e
Press PC Fax Receive.
f
The LCD gives you options that you have set up in the PC-Fax receiving program on your PC. If you started the
PC-FAX Receiving program on your computer, press OK. (See PC-FAX
Receiving in the Software User's
Guide.) g
Press a or b to choose <USB> or your computer name if the machine is connected to a network.
Press OK.
4
Receiving a fax h
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off
.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
IMPORTANT
If you choose Backup Print On, the machine will also print the fax at your machine so you will have a copy. This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine.
4
Note
• Before you can set up PC-Fax Receive you must install the MFL-Pro Suite software on your PC. Make sure your PC is connected and turned on. (For details see PC-FAX Receiving in the Software
User's Guide.)
• If your machine has a problem and is unable to print faxes in memory, you can use this setting to transfer your faxes to a
PC. (For details, see Transferring your
faxes or Fax Journal report in Appendix B of the Basic User's Guide.)
• PC-Fax Receive is not supported in
Mac OS.
• Even if you have turned on the PC-Fax
Receive feature, colour faxes will not be transferred to your PC. The machine prints received colour faxes.
27
Chapter 4
Changing Remote Fax
Options
If received faxes are left in your machine’s memory when you change to another
Remote Fax Option, the LCD will ask you one of the following questions:
Erase All Doc?
Print All Fax?
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory will be erased or printed before the setting changes. If a backup copy has already been printed it will not be printed again.
• If you press No, faxes in the memory will not be erased or printed and the setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to
PC Fax Receive
from another remote fax option (Fax Forward or Fax Storage), the LCD will ask you the following question:
Send Fax to PC?
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory will be sent to your PC before the setting changes.
• If you press No, faxes in the memory will not be erased or transferred to your
PC and the setting will be unchanged.
Backup Print:On
Backup Print:Off
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off
.
IMPORTANT
If you choose Backup Print On, the machine will also print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.
This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine.
4
Turning off Remote Fax Options
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display
Forward/Store
.
Press Forward/Store.
e
Press Off.
Note
The LCD will give you more options if there are received faxes still in your
machine’s memory. (See Changing
Remote Fax Options on page 28.)
f
Press Stop/Exit.
4
28
Remote retrieval
The remote retrieval feature lets you retrieve your stored fax messages when you are not at the machine. You can call your machine from any touch tone phone or fax machine, then use the Remote Access Code to retrieve your messages.
4
Setting a Remote Access Code
The Remote Access Code feature lets you access the remote retrieval features when you are away from your machine. Before you use the remote access and retrieval features, you have to set up your own code. The default code is the inactive code: – – –l.
4
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Remote Access
.
Press Remote Access.
d
Enter a three-digit code using the numbers 0 – 9, l or #.
Press OK.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
DO NOT use the same code used for your
Remote Activation code (l51) or Remote
Deactivation code (#51).(See Using
Remote Codes in Chapter 6 of the Basic
User's Guide.)
You can change your code at any time. If you want to make your code inactive, press
Clear
and OK in d to restore the default
setting – – –l.
Receiving a fax
Using your Remote Access Code
a
Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone dialling.
4
b
When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access
Code c
The machine signals if it has received messages:
No beeps
No messages received.
1 long beep
Fax message received.
d
The machine gives two short beeps to tell you to enter a command. The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds before entering a command. If you enter an invalid command the machine will beep three times.
e
Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you have finished.
f
Hang up.
Note
If your machine is set to Manual mode, you can still access the remote retrieval features. Dial the fax number as normal and let the machine ring. After
100 seconds you will hear a long beep to tell you to enter the remote access code.
You will then have 30 seconds to enter the code.
4
29
Chapter 4
Retrieving fax messages
a
Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone dialling.
4
b
When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access
Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.
c
When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 9 6 2.
d
Wait for a long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages sent, followed by ##
(up to 20 digits).
e
Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other machine, which will then print your fax messages.
Note
You can insert a pause in a fax number by using the # key.
Changing the Fax Forwarding number
4
You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number from another telephone or fax machine using touch tone dialling.
a
Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone dialling.
b
When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access
Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.
c
When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 9 5 4.
d
Wait for a long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the new number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages forwarded followed by ## (up to 20 digits).
e
Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you have finished.
f
Hang up after you hear your machine beep.
Note
You can insert a pause in a fax number by using the # key.
30
Receiving a fax
Remote fax commands
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.
4
Remote commands
95
Change the fax forwarding or fax storage settings
1 OFF
96
97
98
90
Operation details
2 Fax Forwarding
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage
You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your messages.
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three short beeps, you cannot change because the conditions have not been met (for example, registering a fax forwarding number). You can register the maximum number of rings. (See
Changing the Fax Forwarding number on page 30.) Once you
have registered the number, fax forwarding will work.
Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes
3 Erase faxes from the memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased from the memory.
Check the receiving status
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax
messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 30.)
1 Fax You can check whether your machine has received any faxes.
If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three short beeps.
Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD
2 Fax/Tel
If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.
3 Fax Only
Exit
Press 9 0 to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then replace the handset.
4
31
Chapter 4
Additional receiving operations
Printing a reduced incoming fax
4
If you choose On, the machine automatically reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on one page of A4, Letter, Legal or Folio size paper.
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the page size of the fax and your Paper
Size setting (MENU, General Setup,
Tray Setting
, Tray Use:Fax). See
Paper Size and Type in Chapter 2 of the
Basic User's Guide.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display
Auto Reduction
.
Press Auto Reduction.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
4
Duplex (2-sided) printing for
Fax mode
4
Your machine can automatically print received faxes onto both sides of the paper when Duplex is set to On.
You can use A4 size paper for this function
(60 to 105 g/m
2
).
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display Duplex.
Press Duplex.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• When Duplex is turned on incoming faxes will automatically be reduced to fit the size of paper in the paper tray.
• When Duplex is set to On, the LCD displays
1 2
(Duplex icon).
32
Setting the Fax Receive
Stamp (black & white only)
You can set the machine to print the received date and time in the top centre of each received fax page.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display Fax Rx Stamp.
Press Fax Rx Stamp.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax.
• Make sure you have set the current date and time in the machine. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.)
4
Receiving a fax
Setting the Print Density
You can adjust the Print Density setting to make your printed pages darker or lighter.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive
.
Press Setup Receive.
d
Press a or b to display
Print Density
.
Press Print Density.
e
Press c to make the print darker.
Or, press d to make the print lighter.
Press OK.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
4
4
33
Chapter 4
Printing a fax from the memory
If you are using the Fax Storage feature
(MENU, Fax, Setup Receive,
Forward/Store
), you can still print a fax from the memory when you are at your
machine. (See Fax Storage on page 26.)
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Print Document
.
Press Print Document.
d
Press Mono Start.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
4
34
Polling overview
Polling lets you set up your machine so other people can receive faxes from you, but they pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it, so you pay for the call. The polling feature needs to be set up on both machines for this to work. Not all fax machines support polling.
4
Polling receive
Polling receive lets you call another fax machine to receive a fax.
a
Press b
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
Press Polling RX.
c
Press Standard.
d
Enter the fax number you are polling using One Touch, Speed Dial, or the dial pad. Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
4
Secure polling
Secure polling lets you restrict who can get the documents you set up to be polled.
Secure polling only works with Brother fax machines. If you want to get a fax from a secured Brother machine you have to enter the secure code.
4
a
Press b
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
Press Polling RX.
c
Press Secure.
d
Enter a four-digit number.
Press OK.
e
Enter the fax number you are polling.
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Receiving a fax
Delayed polling
Delayed polling lets you set the machine to begin polling receive at a later time. You can only set up one delayed polling operation.
4
a
Press b
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
Press Polling RX.
c
Press Timer.
d
Enter the time (in 24-hour format) you want to begin polling.
For example, enter 21:45 for 9:45 PM.
Press OK.
e
Enter the fax number you are polling.
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
The machine makes the polling call at the time you entered.
4
Sequential polling
Sequential polling lets you request documents from several fax machines in one operation.
4
a
Press b
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
Press Polling RX.
c
Press Standard, Secure or Timer.
d
Choose one of the options below.
If you choose Standard go to
If you choose Secure, enter a four-digit number, press OK, go to
If you chose Timer, enter the time
(in 24-hours format) you want to begin polling and press OK, go to
e
Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
Press Broadcasting.
35
Chapter 4 f
Do one of the following:
Press Manual and enter a number by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Press Address Book. Press to choose Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Press a or b to select a number.
Press OK.
Note
One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.
g
After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step f, press OK.
h
Press Mono Start.
The machine polls each number or
Group number in turn for a document.
Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialling to cancel the polling process.
To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,
see Cancelling a Sequential Polling Job on page 36.
Cancelling a Sequential Polling Job
a
Press Stop/Exit.
b
Do one of the following:
To cancel the entire sequential polling job, press
Entire Seq. Poll
To cancel the current job, press the button that displays the number
To exit without cancelling, press
Stop/Exit.
4
c
When the LCD asks if you want to cancel the entire sequential polling job, do one of the following:
Press Yes to confirm.
To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.
d
Do one of the following:
To cancel the current job, press Yes.
To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.
36
5
Dialling and storing numbers
5
Telephone line services
BT Call Sign (U.K. only)
The BT Call Sign subscriber service is a way to have a separate number for your machine, it allows you to have at least two separate telephone numbers on one phone line. Each phone number has its own distinctive ringing pattern.
You can set up your machine so that it only responds to the second number.
When you set the BT Call Sign feature to ON, the receive mode is set to Manual automatically. Manual mode will not respond to incoming telephone calls, since the number you use for telephone calls will use the normal ring pattern. If you turn the feature off, your receive mode will remain on
Manual
.
5
To enable the machine to work with BT
Call Sign
5
This feature will only work with your external phone.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous
.
Press Miscellaneous.
d
Press BT Call Sign.
e
Press On or Off.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Additional dialling operations
5
Combining quick dial numbers
Sometimes you may want to choose from several long distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of long distance carriers and credit card numbers as
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. You can store these long dialling sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate One Touch and Speed Dial numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialling using the dial pad.
See Storing numbers in Chapter 7 of the
Basic User's Guide.
For example, you might have stored ‘555’ in
Speed Dial #003 and ‘7000’ in Speed Dial
#002. You can use them both to dial
‘555-7000’ if you press the following keys:
Press Address Book, #003 and
Send a fax
.
Press Address Book, #002, Send a fax and Mono Start or Colour Start.
Numbers can be added manually by entering them on the dial pad:
Press Address Book, #003, Send a fax,
7001 (on the dial pad), and Mono Start or
Colour Start.
This would dial ‘555–7001’. You can also add a pause by pressing Redial/Pause.
5
5
37
Chapter 5
Additional ways to store numbers
Setting up Groups for
Broadcasting
If you often want to send the same fax message to many fax numbers you can set up a Group.
Groups are stored on a One Touch key or a
Speed Dial number. Each Group uses up a
One Touch key or a Speed Dial location. You can then send the fax message to all the numbers stored in a Group just by pressing a
One Touch key or entering a Speed Dial number, and then pressing Mono Start.
Before you can add numbers to a Group, you need to store them as One Touch or Speed
Dial numbers. You can have up to 20 small
Groups, or you can assign up to 339 numbers to one large Group.
a
Press Address Book.
b
Press More.
c
Press Setup Groups.
d
Press Set Speed Dial or
Set One Touch Dial
which you want to store the new Group to.
Note
The machine automatically allocates an available Speed Dial number or One
Touch Dial location to the new Group.
e
Enter the Group name (up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. Use the chart on
Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic
User's Guide to help you enter letters.
Press OK.
f
Enter the Group number by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
5
5
38
g
To select the telecommunication medium and the file type, press d or c to display
Fax/IFAX
,
E-Mail B&W PDF
,
E-Mail B&W TIFF
,
E-Mail Color PDF
,
E-Mail Color JPEG
,
E-Mail Color XPS
,
E-Mail Gray PDF
,
E-Mail Gray JPEG
or
E-Mail Gray XPS
.
Press the option you want.
h
Add One Touch or Speed Dial numbers to the Group by pressing the check box to display a red check mark.
If you want to list the numbers in alphabetical order, press
Press OK.
.
Note
• One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.
Speed Dial numbers begin with #.
• If the stored telecommunication medium of a One Touch Dial number or a Speed
Dial number is not compatible with the telecommunication medium selected in
step g, the One Touch Dial number or
Speed Dial number will be dimmed on the
LCD.
i
To choose the fax/scan resolution for the Group number, go to the appropriate next step as shown in the following table.
Fax/IFAX
E-Mail Color PDF
E-Mail Color JPEG
E-Mail Color XPS
E-Mail Gray PDF
E-Mail Gray JPEG
E-Mail Gray XPS
E-Mail B&W PDF
E-Mail B&W TIFF
Go to step
j
Select the resolution from Standard,
Fine
, S.Fine
1
S.Fine
is available if the Group is constituted by only fax numbers.
k
Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi
, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.
If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,
If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG or E-Mail Color XPS, go to
l
Select the resolution from 100 dpi,
200 dpi
or 300 dpi.
If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go
If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or
E-Mail Gray XPS
m
Select the resolution from 200 dpi or
200 x 100 dpi
.
If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go
If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go
Dialling and storing numbers n
Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
or Signed PDF that will be used to send E-mail.
Note
If you choose Secure PDF, the machine will ask you to enter a four-digit password using the numbers 0-9 before it starts scanning.
o
Press OK to confirm.
p
Press Stop/Exit.
5
39
Chapter 5
Options for Setting Up Groups
The following chart shows the selections for setting up Group numbers.
When you store numbers, the LCD instructs you to choose from the options shown in the following steps.
5
Step 1
Enter
Group
Location
One
Touch or
Speed
Dial
Step 2
Enter
Group
Name
(Name)
Press OK
Step 3
Enter
Name
Step 4
Select
Registration
Type
(1 to 40) Fax/IFAX
Color PDF
Color JPEG
Color XPS
Gray PDF
Gray JPEG
Gray XPS
B&W PDF
B&W TIFF
Step 5
Add Stored
One Touch and Speed
Dial Numbers to the Group
Fax Number or
Address
Address
Step 6
Select Resolution
Standard
, Fine,
S.Fine
-
Step 7
Select File
Type
100 dpi
300 dpi
, 200 dpi,
, 600 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
, 600 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
, 600 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
-
-
, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
,
Signed PDF
-
, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
,
Signed PDF
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
100 dpi
, 200 dpi,
300 dpi
200 dpi
,
200 x 100 dpi
-
200 dpi
,
200 x 100 dpi
-
, PDF/A,
Secure PDF
,
Signed PDF
1
S.Fine does not appear if you add an E-mail address in step 5.
Note
• If you choose Signed PDF, you must install a certificate to your machine using Web Based
Management. Choose Configure Signed PDF Settings from Administrator Settings in Web
Based Management. For how to install a certificate, see the Network User's Guide.
• PDF/A is a PDF file format intended for long-term archiving. This format contains all the necessary information to be able to reproduce the document after long-term storage.
• A Signed PDF helps prevent data tampering and the impersonation of an author by including a digital certificate within the document.
40
Changing Group numbers
You can change a Group number that has already been stored. If the Group has a fax forwarding number, it will be dimmed on the
LCD. You cannot select the number to make changes.
5
Changing a Group name, Resolution or
PDF type
a
Press Address Book.
b
Press More.
c
Press Change.
d
Press a or b to display the Group you want to change.
Press the Group.
e
Do one of the following:
If you chose Name, enter the name
(up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
If you chose Resolution, press one of the available resolution options displayed on the LCD.
If you chose PDF type, press one of the available file type options displayed on the LCD.
The LCD will display your new setting.
Note
How to change the stored name or number:
If you want to change a character, press d or c to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then press . Re-enter the character.
f
Press OK.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Dialling and storing numbers
Adding and deleting numbers in a Group
a
Press Address Book.
b
Press More.
c
Press Change.
d
Press a or b to display the Group you want to change.
Press the Group.
e
Press Add/Delete.
f
Press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete.
g
Press the check box of the number you want to add to check it.
Press the check box of the number you want to delete to uncheck it.
Press OK to confirm.
h
Press OK.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
5
41
Chapter 5
Deleting Group numbers
You can delete a Group number that has already been stored. If a Group has a scheduled job or fax forwarding number, it will be dimmed on the LCD. You cannot select the number to delete it.
a
Press Address Book.
b
Press More.
c
Press Delete.
d
Press a or b to display the Group you want to delete.
Press the check box of the Group you want to delete to check it.
Press OK.
e
Do one of the following:
To Delete the Group, press Yes.
To exit without deleting the Group, press No.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
5
42
6
Printing reports
6
Fax reports
Some fax reports (transmission verification and fax journal) can be printed automatically and manually.
6
Transmission verification report
You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. (For details about how to set up the type of report you want, see Transmission Verification
Report in Chapter 4 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
6
Fax Journal
You can set the machine to print a fax journal
(activity report) at specific intervals (every
50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). The default setting is Every 50 Faxes, this means that your machine will print the journal when the machine has stored 50 jobs.
If you set the interval to Off, you can still print the report by following the steps on the next page.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
c
Press a or b to display
Report Settings
.
Press Report Settings.
d
Press Journal Period.
6
e
Press d or c to choose an interval
6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at the chosen time and then erase all jobs from its memory.
If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 jobs before the time you chose has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the jobs from the memory.
Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 jobs.
f
Do one of the following:
If you chose Every 50 Faxes
If you chose Every 6, 12, 24 hours or
2 Days
Enter the time to start printing in
24-hour format. (For example: enter
19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press OK.
If you chose Every 7 Days
Enter the time to start printing in
24-hour format. (For example: enter
19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press OK.
Press d or c to choose the day of the week.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
6
43
Chapter 6
Reports
The following reports are available:
1 XMIT Verify
Displays the Transmission Verification
Report for your last outgoing 200 faxes and prints the last report.
2 Help List
Prints a list of commonly used functions to help you program your machine.
3 Tel Index List
Prints a list of names and numbers stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial memory in numerical or alphabetical order.
4 Fax Journal
Prints a list of information about your last
200 incoming and outgoing faxes.
(TX: transmit.) (RX: receive.)
5 User Settings
Print a list of your current settings.
6 Network Config
Lists your network settings.
7 Drum Dot Print
Prints the drum dot check sheet to troubleshoot a dotted print problem.
8 WLAN Report
Prints the result of wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.
9 Order Form
You can print an accessories order form to fill out and send to your Brother dealer.
6
How to print a report
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Print Reports
.
Press Print Reports.
c
Press a or b to display the report you want to print.
Press the report you want to print.
d
Do one of the followings:
If you chose XMIT Verify, press
Print Report
.
If you chose Tel Index List, press Numerical Order or
Alphabetical Order
.
If you chose other than XMIT
Verify
or Tel Index List, go
e
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
6
44
7
Making copies
7
Copy settings
You can change the copy settings temporarily for the next copy.
These settings are temporary, and the machine returns to its default settings one minute after copying, unless you have set the
Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less. (See
To change a setting, press (COPY) and then press d or c to scroll through the copy settings. When the setting you want is displayed, press the button.
When you are finished choosing settings, press Mono Start or Colour Start.
7
Stop copying
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.
7
Improving copy quality
You can choose from a range of quality settings. The default setting is Auto.
Auto
Auto is the recommended mode for ordinary printouts. Suitable for documents that contain both text and photographs.
Text
Suitable for documents containing mainly text.
Photo
Better copy quality for photographs.
Graph
Suitable for copying receipts.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Quality.
Press Quality.
e
Press Auto, Text, Photo or Graph.
f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
7
7
45
Chapter 7
Enlarging or reducing the image copied
To enlarge or reduce the next copy follow the instructions below: a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Enlarge/Reduce
.
Press Enlarge/Reduce.
e
Press 100%, Enlarge, Reduce or
Custom(25-400%)
.
f
Do one of the following:
If you chose Enlarge or Reduce, press the enlargement or reduction ratio button you want.
If you chose Custom(25-400%), enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from 25% to 400%.
Press OK.
If you chose 100%, go to step g.
7
100%
*
104% EXE i LTR
141% A5 i A4
200%
50%
70% A4 i A5
78% LGL i LTR
83% LGL i A4
85% LTR i EXE
91% Full Page
94% A4 i LTR
97% LTR i A4
Custom(25-400%) g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Note
Page Layout Options 2 in 1 (P), 2 in 1 (L),
2 in 1 (ID), 4 in 1 (P) and 4 in 1 (L) are not available with Enlarge/Reduce.
46
Duplex (2-sided) Copying
If you want to use the automatic duplex copy feature, load your document in the ADF.
If you get an Out of Memory message while you are making duplex copies, try installing
extra memory. (See Installing extra memory on page 67.)
You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start duplex copying. The layout of your document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose.
2sidei2side
Portrait
11 11
7
2 2
Landscape
1
2
1sidei2side Long Edge Flip
Portrait
11
2
1
2
2
Landscape
1
2
2
Making copies
2sidei1side Long Edge Flip
Portrait
11
1
Landscape
2 2
2
1sidei2side Short Edge Flip
Portrait
11
1
2
Landscape
2
1
2
1
2
2sidei1side Short Edge Flip
Portrait
11
2
1
2
2
Landscape
1
2
2 a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
47
7
Chapter 7 d
Press d or c to display Duplex Copy.
Press Duplex Copy.
e
Press d or c to display the following layout options:
2sidei2side
,
1sidei2side LongEdgeFlip
,
2sidei1side LongEdgeFlip
,
1sidei2side ShortEdgeFlip
,
2sidei1side ShortEdgeFlip
,
Off
Press the option you want.
f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Tray selection
You can temporarily change the Tray Use option for the next copy.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Tray Use.
Press Tray Use.
e
, T1>MP,
T1>T2>MP
Tray#2 Only
1
T2
and Tray#2 Only appears only if the optional lower tray is installed.
f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Note
To change the default setting for Tray
Use, see Tray Use in copy mode in
Chapter 2 of the Basic User's Guide.
7
Adjusting Brightness and
Contrast
Brightness
Adjust the copy brightness to make copies darker or lighter.
7
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Brightness.
Press Brightness.
e
Press d to make a darker copy or press c
to make a lighter copy.
Press OK.
f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast to help an image look sharper and more vivid.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Contrast.
Press Contrast.
e
Press d to decrease the contrast or press c to increase the contrast.
Press OK.
f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
7
7
48
Sorting copies using the ADF
7
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and so on.
a
Press b
Load your document in the ADF.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Stack / Sort.
Press Stack / Sort.
e
Press Sort.
f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Note
Sort is available only when the document is in the ADF.
Making copies
Making N in 1 copies
(page layout)
You can reduce the amount of paper used when copying by using the N in 1 copy feature. This allows you to copy two or four pages onto one page. If you want to copy both sides of an ID card onto one page, see
IMPORTANT
• Please make sure the paper size is set to
Letter
, A4, Legal or Folio.
• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce setting with the N in 1 feature.
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means
Landscape.
7
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Page Layout.
Press Page Layout.
e
Press d or c to display Off(1in1),
2in1(P)
,
4in1(P)
or 4in1(L).
Press the button you want.
1
For details about 2in1(ID), see 2 in 1 ID
f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start to scan the page.
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
If you are using the scanner glass, go
g
After the machine scans the page, press
Yes
to scan the next page.
7
49
Chapter 7 h
Put the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
Repeat steps g and h for each page of
the layout.
i
After all the pages have been scanned,
If you are copying from the ADF:
Insert your document face up in the direction shown below:
7
2 in 1 (P)
2 in 1 (L)
If you are copying from the scanner glass:
Insert your document face down in the direction shown below:
2 in 1 (P)
7
2 in 1 (L)
4 in 1 (P)
4 in 1 (L)
4 in 1 (P)
4 in 1 (L)
50
2 in 1 ID Copy
You can copy both sides of your identification card onto one page, keeping the original card size.
7
Note
You can copy an identification card to the extent permitted under applicable laws.
See Unlawful use of copying equipment in the Safety and Legal Booklet.
a
Press b
Place your identification card face down on the left side of the scanner glass.
Making copies h
Press Mono Start or Colour Start. The machine scans the other side of the card and prints the page.
Note
When 2 in 1 ID Copy is chosen, the machine sets the quality to Photo and the contrast to +2.
7
Even if a document is placed on the
ADF, the machine scans the data from the scanner glass.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Page Layout.
Press Page Layout.
e
Press d or c to display 2in1(ID).
Press 2in1(ID).
f
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
After the machine scans the first side of the card, the LCD will display Turn over the ID Card Then Press
Start
.
g
Turn over your identification card and place it on the left side of the scanner glass.
51
Chapter 7
Adjusting Colour (Saturation)
7
You can change the default setting for colour saturation.
a
Press b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Color Adjust.
Press Color Adjust.
e
Press Red, Green or Blue.
f
Press d to decrease or c to increase the colour saturation.
Press OK.
g
Repeat steps e and f if you want to
adjust the next colour. Press .
h
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or
Colour Start.
Setting your changes as the new default
7
You can save the copy settings for Quality,
Brightness
, Contrast and
Color Adjust
you use most often by setting them as the default. These settings will stay until you change them again.
a
Press b
Press d or c to choose the setting you want to change, and then press the new option.
Repeat this step for each setting you want to change.
c
After changing the last setting, press d or c to display Set New Default.
Press Set New Default.
d
Press Yes.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Restoring all copy settings to the factory settings
7
You can restore all the copy settings you have changed to the factory settings. These settings will stay until you change them again.
a
Press b
After changing the last setting, press d or c to display Factory Reset.
Press Factory Reset.
c
Press Yes.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
52
Setting your favourites
You can store the copy settings that you use most often by setting them as a favourite. You can set up to three favourites.
a
Press b
Choose the copy option and settings you want to store.
c
Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings
.
Press Favorite Settings.
d
Press Store.
e
Press the location where you want to store your setting for Favorite:1,
Favorite:2
or Favorite:3.
f
Do one of the following:
If you want to rename your setting, press to delete characters. Then enter the new name (up to 12 characters). Press OK.
If you do not want to rename your setting, press OK.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
7
Retrieving your favourite setting
When you are ready to use one of your favourite set of settings, you can recall it.
a
Press b
Press Favorite.
c
Press the favourite setting you want to retrieve.
d
Press Mono Start or Colour Start.
7
Making copies
Rename your favourite setting
After you stored your favourite setting, you can rename it.
7
a
Press b
Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings
.
Press Favorite Settings.
c
Press Rename.
d
Press the favourite setting you want to rename.
e
Enter the new name (up to 12 characters).
f
Press OK.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
7
53
54
A
Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking the machine
A
Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure that you clean the inside of the machine. If printed pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.
WARNING
DO NOT use cleaning materials that contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of spray, or any type of flammable substance to clean the outside or inside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
See To use the product safely in the Safety
and Legal Booklet for how to clean the machine.
Checking the Page Counters
A
You can see the machine’s Page Counters for copies, printed pages, reports and lists, faxes or a summary total.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Machine Info.
.
Press Machine Info..
c
Press Page Counter.
The LCD shows number of pages for
Total
, Fax/List, Copy or Print.
d
Press Total, Fax/List, Copy or
to see the page counters for
Colour and Black & White.
e
Do one of the following:
To see the other options, press
To exit, press Stop/Exit.
.
A
Be careful not to inhale toner.
IMPORTANT
Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine will damage the surface of the machine.
Checking the remaining life of parts
A
You can see the machine’s parts life on the
LCD.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Machine Info.
.
Press Machine Info..
c
Press Parts Life.
d
Press a or b to see the approximate remaining parts life of the Drum,
Belt Unit
, Fuser, Laser,
PF Kit MP
, PF Kit 1 and
PF Kit 2
.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Routine maintenance
Replacing periodic maintenance parts
The periodic maintenance parts will need to be replaced regularly to maintain the print quality. The parts listed below will have to be replaced after printing approximately 50,000 pages
for PF Kit MP and 100,000 pages
for PF Kit 1, PF Kit 2, Fuser and Laser.
Please call your Brother dealer when the
following messages appear on the LCD.
1
A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.
A
LCD message
Replace Parts
Fuser Unit
Replace Parts
Laser Unit
Replace Parts
PF Kit 1
Replace Parts
PF Kit 2
Replace Parts
PF Kit MP
Description
Replace the fuser unit.
Replace the laser unit.
Replace the paper feeding kit for the paper tray.
Replace the paper feeding kit for the lower tray
(option).
Replace the paper feeding kit for the multi-purpose tray.
A
55
Packing and shipping the machine
A
WARNING
This machine is heavy and weighs approximately 28.5 kg. To prevent possible injuries at least two people should lift the machine. Be careful not to pinch your fingers when you put the machine down.
Note
If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier.
Make sure that you have the following parts for repacking:
1
3
2
If you use a Lower Tray, carry it separately from your machine.
IMPORTANT
When shipping the machine, the waste toner box must be removed from the machine and put in a plastic bag, and then sealed. Failure to remove it and put it in a plastic bag before shipping may cause severe damage to the machine and may void the warranty.
1 Plastic bag for the waste toner box
2 Orange packing materials for locking the internal parts (4 pieces)
3 A piece of paper (A4 or Letter) to protect the belt unit (Please supply this yourself)
56
a
Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
b
Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.
Routine maintenance c
Hold the green handle of the drum unit.
Pull the drum unit out until it stops.
A
57
d
Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
1
IMPORTANT
• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
• We recommend that you place the drum unit on a clean, flat surface with a piece of disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• Handle the toner cartridge and the waste toner box carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.
• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
58
e
Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.
Routine maintenance f
Remove the two pieces of orange packing material and discard them.
Note
This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and is not required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to protect your machine during shipment from the factory.
A
59
g
Remove the waste toner box from the machine using the green handle, and then put it in a plastic bag and seal the bag completely.
h
Put the belt unit back into the machine.
Make sure the belt unit is level and fits firmly into place.
IMPORTANT
Handle the waste toner box carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.
60
Routine maintenance i
Install orange packing materials to the drum unit as follows:
To secure the toner cartridges, install the matching orange packing strips
(1) (marked L and R) to the drum unit on the left and right sides, as shown in the illustration.
Attach the orange packing strip (2) to the left side of the drum unit, as shown in the illustration.
Slide the small orange packing material (3) onto the metal shaft on the right side of the drum unit, as shown in the illustration.
2
1 L
1 R
A
3
61
j
Put a piece of paper (A4 or Letter) on the belt unit to prevent damage to the belt unit.
l
Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
1
2
k
Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.
m
Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.
1
1
62
n
Push the drum unit in until it stops.
Routine maintenance p
Put the Styrofoam piece (2) into the lower carton (1). Then put the waste toner box in the Styrofoam piece.
FRONT
2
1 q
Wrap the machine with a plastic bag.
Put the machine on the Styrofoam piece
(1).
A
o
Close the front cover of the machine.
1
FRONT
63
r
Put the Styrofoam piece (2) into the back side of Styrofoam piece (1) as shown in the illustration.
2 s
Place the upper carton (1) over the machine and the lower carton (2). Align the joint holes of the upper carton with the joint holes of the lower carton.
Secure the upper carton to the lower carton using the four plastic joints (3) as shown in the illustration.
1
3
1
3
2
3
64
t
Put the two Styrofoam pieces (1) into the carton matching the right of the machine to the "RIGHT" mark on one of the
Styrofoam pieces, and the left of the machine to the "LEFT" mark on the other Styrofoam piece. Put the AC power cord and printed materials in the original carton as shown in the illustration.
1
LEFT
1
RIGHT
Routine maintenance
A
u
Close the carton and tape it shut.
65
B
Options
Optional paper tray
(LT-300CL)
An optional lower tray can be installed, and it can hold up to 500 sheets of 80 g/m
2
paper.
When an optional tray is installed, the machine can hold up to 800 sheets of plain paper.
B
For setup, see the Instructions that we have supplied with the lower tray unit.
Memory board
MFC-9970CDW has 256 MB of standard memory. The machine has one slot for optional memory expansion. You can increase the memory up to maximum of
512 MB by installing one SO-DIMM (Small
Outline Dual In-line Memory Module).
SO-DIMM Types
B
B
You can install the following SO-DIMMs:
128 MB Kingston KTH-LJ2015/128
256 MB Kingston KTH-LJ2015/256
128 MB Transcend TS128MHP422A
256 MB Transcend TS256MHP423A
Note
• For more information, visit the Kingston
Technology website at http://www.kingston.com/.
• For more information, visit the Transcend website at http://www.transcend.com.tw/.
In general, the SO-DIMM must have the following specifications:
Type: 144-pin and 16-bit output
CAS latency: 4
Clock frequency: 267 MHz (533 Mb/S/Pin) or more
Capacity: 64, 128 or 256 MB
Height: 30.0 mm (1.18 in.)
DRAM type: DDR2 SDRAM
Note
• There might be some SO-DIMMs that will not work with the machine.
• For more information, call the dealer you bought the machine from or Brother
Customer Service.
66
B
Installing extra memory
a
Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord.
b
Disconnect the interface cable from the machine, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
Note
Be sure to turn off the machine’s power switch before you install or remove the
SO-DIMM.
c
Remove the plastic (1) and then metal (2) SO-DIMM covers.
2
1
B
Options e
Hold the SO-DIMM by the edges and align the notches in the SO-DIMM with the protrusions in the slot. Insert the
SO-DIMM diagonally (1), then tilt it toward the interface board until it clicks into place (2).
1 2 f
Put the metal (2) and then the plastic (1)
SO-DIMM covers back on.
1
B
d
Unpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by its edges.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the memory chips or the board surface.
2 g
Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, and then connect the interface cable.
67
h
Plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine’s power switch.
Note
To make sure that you have installed the
SO-DIMM properly, you can print the user settings page that shows the current
memory size. (See How to print a report on page 44.)
68
C
Glossary
C
This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of these features depends on the model you purchased.
ADF (automatic document feeder)
The document can be placed in the ADF and scanned one page at a time automatically.
Auto Reduction
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
Automatic fax transmission
Sending a fax without picking up the handset of the external telephone.
Automatic Redial
A feature that enables your machine to redial the last fax number after five minutes if the fax did not go through because the line was busy.
Backup Print
Your machine prints a copy of every fax that is received and stored in memory.
This is a safety feature so you will not lose messages during a power failure.
Batch Transmission
As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes to the same fax number will be sent as one transmission.
Beeper Volume
Volume setting for the beep when you press a key or make an error.
Broadcasting
The ability to send the same fax message to more than one location.
BT Call Sign
A subscriber service purchased from the telephone company in U.K. that gives you another phone number on an existing phone line. The Brother machine uses the new number to simulate a dedicated fax line.
Cancel Job
Cancels a programmed print job and clears the machine’s memory.
CNG tones
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax machines during automatic transmission to tell the receiving machine that a fax machine is calling.
Coding method
Method of coding the information contained in the document. All fax machines must use a minimum standard of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine is capable of greater compression methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified
Modified Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the receiving machine has the same capability.
Communication error (or Comm. Error)
An error during fax sending or receiving, usually caused by line noise or static.
Compatibility group
The ability of one fax unit to communicate with another. Compatibility is assured between ITU-T Groups.
Contrast
Setting to compensate for dark or light documents, by making faxes or copies of dark documents lighter and light documents darker.
Delayed Fax
Sends your fax at a specified later time that day.
Dual Access
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or scheduled jobs into memory at the same time it is sending a fax or receiving or printing an incoming fax.
C
69
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
Detects errors during fax transmission and resends the pages of the fax that had an error.
Extension telephone
A telephone on the fax number that is plugged into a separate wall socket.
External phone
A TAD (telephone answering device) or telephone that is connected to your machine.
F/T Ring Time
The length of time that the Brother machine fast double-rings (when the
Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up a voice call that it answered.
Fax Detect
Enables your machine to respond to CNG tones if you interrupt a fax call by answering it.
Fax Forwarding
Sends a fax received into the memory to another pre-programmed fax number.
Fax Journal
Lists information about the last
200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.
Fax Storage
You can store faxes in the memory.
Fax tones
The signals sent by sending and receiving fax machines while communicating information.
Fax/Tel
You can receive faxes and telephone calls. Do not use this mode if you are using a telephone answering device
(TAD).
Fine resolution
Resolution is 203
× 196 dpi. It is used for small print and graphs.
Greyscale
The shades of grey available for copying and faxing photographs.
Group number
A combination of One Touch and
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on an
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location for Broadcasting.
Help List
A printout of the complete Menu table that you can use to program your machine when you do not have the User’s Guides with you.
Journal Period
The pre-programmed time period between automatically printed Fax
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax
Journal on demand without interrupting the cycle.
LCD (liquid crystal display)
The display screen on the machine that shows interactive messages during
On-Screen Programming and shows the date and time when the machine is idle.
Manual fax
When you lift the handset of your external telephone so you can hear the receiving fax machine answer before you press
Mono Start or Colour Start to begin transmission.
Menu mode
Programming mode for changing your machine’s settings.
OCR (optical character recognition)
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR or Presto! PageManager software application converts an image of text to text you can edit.
One Touch
Keys on the machine’s control panel where you can store numbers for easy dialling. You can store a second number on each key if you press 21-40 and the
One Touch key together.
70
Out of Paper Reception
Receives faxes into the machine’s memory when the machine is out of paper.
Overseas Mode
Makes temporary changes to the fax tones to accommodate noise and static on overseas telephone lines.
Pause
Allows you to place a 2.8 second delay in the dialling sequence while you are dialling using the dial pad or while you are storing One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. Press Redial/Pause as many times as needed for longer pauses.
Polling
The process of a fax machine calling another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax messages.
Pulse
A form of rotary dialling on a telephone line.
Real Time Transmission
When memory is full, you can send faxes in real time.
Remaining Jobs
You can check which programmed fax jobs are waiting in the memory and cancel the jobs individually.
Remote Access Code
Your own four-digit code (– – –l) that allows you to call and access your machine from a remote location.
Remote Activation code
Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer a fax call on an extension or external telephone.
Remote Retrieval Access
The ability to access your machine remotely from a touch tone telephone.
Resolution
The number of vertical and horizontal lines per inch.
Glossary
Ring Delay
The number of rings before the machine answers in Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.
Ring Volume
Volume setting for the machine’s ring.
Scanning
The process of sending an electronic image of a paper document into your computer.
Search
An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored
One Touch, Speed Dial, Group numbers and LDAP.
Speed Dial
A pre-programmed number for easy dialling. Press Address Book, then enter the three-digit Speed Dial location, press Send a fax or Send a E-mail and press Mono Start or Colour Start to begin the dialling process.
Station ID
The stored information that appears on the top of faxed pages. It includes the sender’s name and fax number.
TAD (telephone answering device)
You can connect an external TAD to your machine.
Tel Index List
A listing of names and numbers stored in
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in numerical order.
Temporary settings
You can choose certain options for each fax transmission and copy without changing the default settings.
Tone
A form of dialling on the telephone line used for Touch Tone telephones.
Transmission
The process of sending faxes over the telephone lines from your machine to the receiving fax machine.
C
71
User Settings List
A printed report that shows the current settings of the machine.
Xmit Report (Transmission Verification
Report)
A listing for each transmission, that shows its date, time and number.
72
D
Index
A
Apple Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.
B
Broadcasting
............................................18
cancelling
..............................................19
setting up groups for
.............................38
C
Cancelling broadcast in process
.............................19
fax jobs in memory
................................21
fax storage
............................................26
jobs awaiting redial
...............................21
remote fax options
................................28
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)
See Software User’s Guide.
ControlCenter4 (for Windows
®
)
See Software User’s Guide.
Copy
2 in 1 ID Copy
.......................................51
brightness
.............................................48
contrast
.................................................48
Enlarge/Reduce
....................................46
key
........................................................45
N in 1 (page layout)
..............................49
quality
...................................................45
sort (ADF only)
......................................49
temporary settings
................................45
using ADF
.............................................49
using scanner glass
..............................49
Cover page
..............................................22
custom comments
.................................22
for all faxes
...........................................23
printed form
...........................................23
D
Daylight Savings Time
............................... 1
Deep Sleep mode
...................................... 3
Delayed batch transmission
Dialling groups (broadcasting)
restricting dialling
................................. 13
Drum unit checking (remaining life)
Dual access
............................................. 17
Duplex copy
............................................. 47
E
Enlarge/Reduce
....................................... 46
F
Fax codes changing
............................................... 29
remote access code
............................. 29
Fax forwarding changing remotely
,
programming a number
Fax storage
............................................. 26
printing from memory
........................... 34
turning off
............................................. 28
turning on
............................................. 26
Fax, stand-alone receiving fax forwarding
.............................. 25
,
fax receive stamp
.............................. 33
into memory (fax storage)
polling receive
................................... 35
reducing to fit on paper
retrieving from a remote site
,
to your PC
......................................... 27
sending
................................................. 15
broadcasting
...................................... 18
cancelling from memory
contrast
............................................. 16
delayed batch
.................................... 20
delayed fax
........................................ 20
from memory (dual access)
manual
.............................................. 17
overseas
............................................ 20
polled transmit
................................... 24
real time transmission
resolution
........................................... 16
D
73
G
Groups for broadcasting
H
HELP
........................................................44
Help List
................................................44
L
LCD (liquid crystal display) backlight brightness
................................3
Help List
................................................44
M
Machine information checking remaining life of parts
page counts
..........................................54
Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide.
Maintenance, routine
...............................54
checking the remaining life of parts
Manual transmission
..........................................17
Memory adding DIMM (option)
installing
.............................................67
storage
....................................................1
N
N in 1 (page layout)
..................................49
Network faxing
See Software User’s Guide.
printing
See Network User’s Guide.
scanning
See Software User’s Guide.
P
Page layout (N in 1)
.................................49
PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR
See Software User’s Guide and Help in the
PaperPort™ 12SE application to access
How-to-Guides.
74
PC-Fax
See Software User’s Guide.
Polling polled transmit
...................................... 24
polling receive
...................................... 35
Power failure
............................................. 1
Presto! PageManager
See Software User’s Guide. See also Help in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print fax from memory
.................................. 34
reports
.................................................. 44
Printing
See Software User’s Guide.
Q
Quality copying
................................................. 45
Quick dial broadcasting
......................................... 18
using groups
...................................... 18
group dial setting up groups for broadcasting
R
Redial/Pause key
.................................... 71
Reducing copies
................................................... 46
incoming faxes
..................................... 32
Remote retrieval
...................................... 29
access code
......................................... 29
commands
............................................ 31
getting your faxes
................................. 30
Remote setup
See Software User’s Guide.
Reports
.............................................. 43
Fax Journal
..................................... 43
journal period
.................................... 43
Help List
............................................... 44
how to print
........................................... 44
Network Configuration
Tel Index List
........................................ 44
Transmission Verification
User Settings
........................................ 44
Resolution fax (standard, fine, superfine, photo)
setting for next fax
................................ 16
Restricted users
........................................ 7
S
Scanning
See Software User’s Guide.
Security restricting dialling
..................................13
Secure function lock administrator password
Public user mode
................................. 7
restricted users
....................................7
Setting lock
...........................................11
Sleep mode
................................................2
Sort
..........................................................49
T
Temporary copy settings
Timer for mode keys
..................................4
Toner Save
................................................2
W
Windows
®
See Software User’s Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User’s Guide.
75
D
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
advertisement
Key Features
- Print, scan, copy and fax
- Wireless networking
- Automatic document feeder
- Large touchscreen display
- High-speed printing
- High-resolution scanning
Frequently Answers and Questions
How do I load paper into the standard paper tray?
How do I send a fax?
How do I print a document from my computer?
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 30 Using the documentation
- 30 Symbols and conventions used in the documentation
- 31 Network User’s Guide
- 31 Viewing Documentation
- 33 Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh)
- 35 Control panel overview
- 37 LCD Touchscreen
- 38 Basic Operations
- 39 Volume settings
- 39 Ring volume
- 39 Beeper volume
- 39 Speaker volume
- 40 Loading paper and print media
- 40 Loading paper in the standard paper tray
- 42 Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
- 46 Unscannable and unprintable areas
- 47 Paper settings
- 47 Paper Size and Type
- 48 Tray Use in copy mode
- 48 Tray Use in fax mode
- 49 Tray Use in print mode
- 50 Acceptable paper and other print media
- 50 Recommended paper and print media
- 50 Type and size of paper
- 52 Handling and using special paper
- 55 How to load documents
- 55 Using the automatic document feeder (ADF)
- 56 Using the scanner glass
- 57 How to send a fax
- 58 Faxing Letter/Legal/Folio size documents from the scanner glass
- 59 Colour fax transmission
- 59 Cancelling a fax in progress
- 59 Transmission verification report
- 61 Receive modes
- 61 Choosing the receive mode
- 62 Using receive modes
- 62 Fax Only
- 62 Fax/Tel
- 62 Manual
- 62 External TAD
- 63 Receive Mode settings
- 63 Ring Delay
- 63 F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
- 64 Fax Detect
- 65 Telephone line services
- 65 Setting the telephone line type
- 66 Connecting an external TAD
- 66 Connections
- 67 Recording an outgoing message (OGM)
- 67 Multi-line connections (PBX)
- 68 External and extension telephones
- 68 Connecting an external or extension telephone
- 68 Operation from external or extension telephones
- 68 For Fax/Tel mode only
- 68 Using extension telephones (U.K. only)
- 69 Using a non-Brother cordless external handset
- 70 Using Remote Codes
- 71 How to dial
- 71 Manual dialling
- 71 One Touch dialling
- 71 Speed dialling
- 72 Search
- 72 LDAP search
- 72 Fax redial
- 73 Storing numbers
- 73 Storing a pause
- 74 One Touch and Speed Dial Storage Options
- 75 Storing One Touch Dial numbers
- 77 Storing Speed Dial numbers
- 78 Changing or Deleting One Touch and Speed Dial numbers
- 79 Tone or Pulse
- 80 How to copy
- 80 Stop copying
- 80 Copy settings
- 81 3™ file for direct printing
- 82 supporting mass storage
- 83 Changing the default settings for direct print
- 84 Printing a document
- 85 Scanning a document
- 85 Scanning using the scan key
- 86 Scanning using a scanner driver
- 87 Replacing the consumable items
- 91 Replacing a Toner cartridge
- 97 Replacing the drum unit
- 103 Replacing the belt unit
- 109 Replacing the waste toner box
- 116 Cleaning and Checking the machine
- 116 Cleaning the outside of the machine
- 117 Cleaning the scanner glass
- 118 Cleaning the laser scanner windows
- 122 Cleaning the corona wires
- 126 Cleaning the drum unit
- 132 Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers
- 133 Calibration
- 134 Auto Registration
- 135 Manual Registration
- 135 Frequency (Colour Correction)
- 136 Error and maintenance messages
- 143 Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report
- 144 Document jams
- 144 Document is jammed in the top of the ADF unit
- 144 Document is jammed under the document cover
- 145 Removing small documents jammed in the ADF
- 145 Document is jammed at the output tray
- 146 Paper jams
- 146 Paper is jammed in the MP tray
- 147 Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray
- 148 Paper is jammed at the back of the machine
- 150 Paper is jammed inside the machine
- 154 Paper is jammed underneath paper tray
- 157 If you are having difficulty with your machine
- 166 Setting Dial Tone detection
- 166 Telephone line interference / VoIP
- 167 Improving the print quality
- 174 Machine Information
- 174 Checking the Serial Number
- 174 Reset functions
- 175 How to reset the machine
- 176 On-screen programming
- 176 Menu table
- 176 MENU button and mode keys
- 177 Menu table
- 212 Entering text
- 213 General
- 215 Document Size
- 216 Print media
- 220 Scanner
- 221 Printer
- 222 Interfaces
- 223 Direct Print feature
- 224 Scan to USB feature
- 225 Computer requirements
- 227 Consumable items
- 228 Network (LAN)
- 240 Memory storage
- 240 Automatic daylight savings time
- 241 Ecology features
- 241 Toner Save
- 241 Sleep mode
- 242 Deep Sleep mode
- 242 LCD screen
- 242 Setting the backlight brightness
- 242 Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight
- 243 Mode Timer
- 244 Secure Function Lock
- 245 Setting and changing the Administrator Password
- 246 Setting up and changing the Public user mode
- 246 Setting up and changing restricted users
- 248 Turning Secure Function Lock on/off
- 249 Switching Users
- 250 Setting Lock
- 250 Setting up the password
- 251 Changing your Setting Lock password
- 251 Turning Setting Lock on/off
- 252 Restricting dialling
- 252 Dial pad restriction
- 252 One Touch restriction
- 252 Speed Dial restriction
- 253 LDAP server restriction
- 254 Additional sending options
- 254 Sending faxes using multiple settings
- 254 Changing a 2-sided fax layout
- 255 Contrast
- 255 Changing Fax Resolution
- 256 Additional sending operations
- 256 Sending a fax manually
- 256 Dual access (black & white only)
- 257 Broadcasting (black & white only)
- 258 Real Time Transmission
- 259 Overseas Mode
- 259 Delayed Fax (black & white only)
- 259 Delayed batch transmission (black & white only)
- 260 Checking and cancelling waiting jobs
- 260 Setting your changes as the new default
- 260 Restoring all fax settings to the factory settings
- 261 Electronic cover page (black & white only)
- 263 Polling overview
- 263 Polled transmit (black & white only)
- 264 Remote Fax Options (black & white only)
- 264 Out of Paper Reception
- 264 Fax Forwarding
- 265 Fax Storage
- 266 PC-Fax Receive
- 267 Changing Remote Fax Options
- 268 Remote retrieval
- 270 Remote fax commands
- 271 Additional receiving operations
- 271 Printing a reduced incoming fax
- 271 Duplex (2-sided) printing for Fax mode
- 272 Setting the Fax Receive Stamp (black & white only)
- 272 Setting the Print Density
- 273 Printing a fax from the memory
- 274 Polling overview
- 274 Polling receive
- 276 Telephone line services
- 276 BT Call Sign (U.K. only)
- 276 Additional dialling operations
- 276 Combining quick dial numbers
- 277 Additional ways to store numbers
- 277 Setting up Groups for Broadcasting
- 279 Options for Setting Up Groups
- 280 Changing Group numbers
- 281 Deleting Group numbers
- 282 Fax reports
- 282 Transmission verification report
- 282 Fax Journal
- 283 Reports
- 283 How to print a report
- 284 Copy settings
- 284 Stop copying
- 284 Improving copy quality
- 285 Enlarging or reducing the image copied
- 286 Duplex (2-sided) Copying
- 287 Tray selection
- 287 Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
- 288 Sorting copies using the ADF
- 288 Making N in 1 copies (page layout)
- 290 2 in 1 ID Copy
- 291 Adjusting Colour (Saturation)
- 291 Setting your changes as the new default
- 291 Restoring all copy settings to the factory settings
- 292 Setting your favourites
- 293 Cleaning and checking the machine
- 293 Checking the Page Counters
- 294 Checking the remaining life of parts
- 294 Replacing periodic maintenance parts
- 295 Packing and shipping the machine
- 305 Optional paper tray (LT-300CL)
- 305 Memory board
- 305 SO-DIMM Types
- 306 Installing extra memory